ST 3000 Smart Transmitter
Release 300 and Smart Field
Communicator Model STS103
User’s Manual
34-ST-25-14
6/08
Honeywell Process Solutions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Publication
This manual is intended as a detailed “how to” reference for installing, piping, wiring, configuring,
starting up, operating, maintaining, calibrating, and servicing Honeywell’s family of Release 300
Series 100 and Series 900 ST 3000® Smart Transmitters. It is based on using a model STS103
Smart Field Communicator (SFC®) as the operator interface for the ST 3000 transmitter. Be aware
that data in this manual overlaps information in the ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Installation Guide
and the Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Operating Guide to minimize cross reference.
While this manual provides detailed procedures to assist first time users, it also includes keystroke
summaries for most procedures as a quick reference for experienced users.
If you will be digitally integrating the ST 3000 transmitter with our TotalPlant® Solution (TPS)
system, you will need to supplement this information with data in the PM/APM Smartline®
Transmitter Integration Manual which is supplied with the TDC 3000®X bookset. TPS is the
evolution of TDC 3000X.
This manual does not apply for non Release 300 Series 100, Series 600, Series 100e and non
Release 300 Series 900 transmitter models. If you have a non Release 300 Series 100 or Series
600 ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, refer to the Installation Guide 34-ST-33-28 and User’s Manual
34-ST-25-09 supplied with the transmitter for information. If you have a non Release 300 Series
900 or Series 100e Smart Transmitter, refer to the Installation Guide 34-ST-33-31 and User’s
Manual 34-ST-25-11 supplied with the transmitter for information.
Patent Notice
This product is covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 4,520,488; 4,567,466;
4,494,183; 4,502,335; 4,592,002; 4,553,104; 4,541,282; 4,806,905; 4,797,669; 4,735,090;
4,768,382; 4,787,250; 4,888,992; 5,811,690; 5,875,150; 5,765,436; 4,734,873; 6,041,659 and
other patents pending.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
References
Publication
Title
Publication
Number
Binder
Title
Binder
Number
Smart Field Communicator
Model STS103
34-ST-11-14
Operating Guide
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter
Series 100 and Series 900
Release 300
34-ST-33-39
Installation Guide
For R400 and later:
PM/APM Smartline Transmitter
Integration Manual
PM12-410
Implementation/
PM/APM Optional Devices
TDC 2045
Symbol Definitions
This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product
Manual for additional information. This symbol appears next to required
information in the manual.
This WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product
Manual for additional information. This symbol appears next to required
information in the manual.
WARNING: risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a potential
shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4
Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible.
ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for
handling electrostatic sensitive devices
Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth
(green or green/yellow) supply system conductor.
Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be
bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national
and local electrical code requirements.
iv
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
References.................................................................................................................................................. iv
Technical Assistance.................................................................................................................................xiii
SECTION 1 —OVERVIEW - FIRST TIME USERS ONLY................................................. 1
1.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................................1
1.2 ST 3000 Smart Transmitters .............................................................................................................2
1.3 Smart Field Communicator................................................................................................................8
1.4 Transmitter/SFC Order....................................................................................................................11
1.5 Local Smart Meter Options..............................................................................................................13
SECTION 2 —QUICK START REFERENCE.................................................................. 15
2.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................15
2.2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly ................................................................................16
SECTION 3 —PREINSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS .............................................. 17
3.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................17
3.2 CE Conformity (Europe) Notice.......................................................................................................18
3.3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter .........................................................................................19
3.4 Considerations for SFC ...................................................................................................................22
3.5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option.................................................................................24
SECTION 4 —INSTALLATION.......................................................................................25
4.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................25
4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter........................................................................................................26
4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter.............................................................................................................38
4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter.............................................................................................................43
SECTION 5 —GETTING STARTED ............................................................................... 49
5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................49
5.2 Establishing Communications .........................................................................................................50
5.3 Making Initial Checks.......................................................................................................................54
5.4 Changing Mode of Operation ..........................................................................................................57
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
SECTION 6 —CONFIGURATION ...................................................................................59
6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 59
6.2 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 60
6.3 Entering a Tag Number................................................................................................................... 71
6.4 Selecting Output Form .................................................................................................................... 73
6.5 Adjusting Damping Time................................................................................................................. 76
6.6 Selecting Unit of Measurement....................................................................................................... 78
6.7 Setting Range Values Using SFC................................................................................................... 80
6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments ............................................................................ 84
6.9 Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only) ............................................................................. 91
6.10 Selecting Message Format (DE Mode Only) .................................................................................. 94
6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC .............................................................................................. 96
6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons ............................................................................... 103
6.13 Disconnecting SFC ....................................................................................................................... 122
SECTION 7 —STARTUP...............................................................................................123
7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 123
7.2 Startup Tasks................................................................................................................................ 124
7.3 Running Analog Output Check ..................................................................................................... 125
7.4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter....................................................................................... 128
7.5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter................................................................................ 131
7.6 Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank.................................................................................... 133
7.7 Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank ............................................................................ 136
7.8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter....................................................... 140
7.9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter ........................................ 144
7.10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter................................................................................ 145
7.11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with Remote Seals............................................ 147
SECTION 8 —OPERATION ..........................................................................................151
8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 151
8.2 Accessing Operation Data ............................................................................................................ 152
8.3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction ............................................................................................. 155
8.4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area ................................................................................................. 157
8.5 Saving and Restoring a Database ................................................................................................ 159
8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display.......................................................................................... 163
SECTION 9 —MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................169
9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 169
9.2 Preventive Maintenance................................................................................................................ 170
9.3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms............................................................................... 171
9.4 Replacing PWA............................................................................................................................. 175
9.5 Replacing Meter Body................................................................................................................... 178
vi
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
SECTION 10 —CALIBRATION..................................................................................... 183
10.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................183
10.2 Overview........................................................................................................................................184
10.3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal ..................................................................................................185
10.4 Calibrating Range with SFC ..........................................................................................................189
10.5 Resetting Calibration .....................................................................................................................192
SECTION 11 —TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................... 195
11.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................195
11.2 Overview........................................................................................................................................196
11.3 Clearing the “#” Symbol From SFC Display ..................................................................................197
11.4 Diagnostic Messages ....................................................................................................................199
11.5 Running Status Check...................................................................................................................202
11.6 Interpreting Messages...................................................................................................................203
11.7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard...........................................................................................207
SECTION 12 —PARTS LIST ........................................................................................ 209
12.1 Replacement Parts........................................................................................................................209
SECTION 13 —REFERENCE DRAWINGS .................................................................. 231
13.1 Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................................................231
APPENDIX A – TABLE III OPTIONS IN MODEL NUMBER......................................... 233
A.1 Table III Options Reference...........................................................................................................233
APPENDIX B – FREEZE PROTECTION OF TRANSMITTERS ................................... 237
B.1 Possible Solutions/Methods ..........................................................................................................237
APPENDIX C – CONFIGURATION RECORD SHEET ................................................. 251
APPENDIX D – HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS REFERENCE......................................... 253
D.1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations................................................................253
D.2 International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Classification of Hazardous Locations ............259
D.3 Enclosure Ratings .........................................................................................................................263
INDEX............................................................................................................................ 266
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter................................................................................2
Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation............................................3
Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Digital DE Mode of Operation. .....................................4
Typical SFC Communication Interface..................................................................................................8
Typical ST 3000 Transmitter and SFC Order Components. ................................................................11
ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option. ............................................................................................14
Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation ...............................................................19
Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations...............................................................26
Leveling a Model STA122 or 922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter. .....................................................30
Figure 10 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation ................................................................................33
Figure 11 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation ..................................................................................34
Figure 12 Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted Installations ...................................................................................35
Figure 13 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation. ..................................................................37
Figure 14 Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping Arrangement. ......................................................38
Figure 15 Typical Piping Arrangement for ½” NPT Process Connection............................................................39
Figure 16 Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters. ........................................................................................43
Figure 17 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Block...................................................................................................44
Figure 18 Ground Connection for Lightning Protection.......................................................................................46
Figure 19 Typical SFC Connections.....................................................................................................................50
Figure 20 Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections.....................................................................................55
Figure 21 Display With All Indicators Lit............................................................................................................56
Figure 22 Keystroke Summary for Changing Mode of Operation. ......................................................................58
Figure 23 Summary of Configuration Process......................................................................................................60
Figure 24 SFC and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories.............................................................................................61
Figure 25 Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration.................................................................66
Figure 26 Keystroke Summary for Entering Tag Number....................................................................................72
Figure 27 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Output Conformity........................................................................74
Figure 28 Square Root Dropout Points.................................................................................................................75
Figure 29 Keystroke Summary for Adjusting Damping Time..............................................................................77
Figure 30 Keystroke Summary for Keying in LRV and URV..............................................................................81
Figure 31 Keystroke Summary for Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures. ...............................................83
Figure 32 Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments.............................90
Figure 33 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication.................................................93
Figure 34 Keystroke Summary for Selecting Message Format. ...........................................................................95
Figure 35 Keystroke Summary for Configuring Local Smart Meter..................................................................102
Figure 36 Button Pushing Summary for Selecting Engineering Units. ..............................................................120
Figure 37 Button Pushing Summary for Setting Lower and Upper Display Limits...........................................121
Figure 38 Typical SFC and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source Mode.........................................127
Figure 39 Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter..............................128
Figure 40 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter.........................131
Figure 41 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with
DP Type Transmitter and Vented Tank..............................................................................................133
Figure 42 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with
DP Type Transmitter and Pressurized Tank.......................................................................................136
Figure 43 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter.........................140
Figure 44 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP TypeTransmitter...................140
Figure 45 Typical Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter..............................144
Figure 46 Typical Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter.......................144
Figure 47 Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter.........................145
viii
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
Figure 48 Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with
DP Type Transmitter with Remote Seals ...........................................................................................147
Figure 49 Location of Failsafe Direction Jumper on PWA................................................................................156
Figure 50 Summary of Save and Restore Database Function.............................................................................159
Figure 51 Display With All Indicators Lit..........................................................................................................163
Figure 52 Typical Calibration Hookup...............................................................................................................191
Figure 53 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. ..........................................................................210
Figure 54 ST 3000 Transmitter Mounting Bracket Parts Reference. .................................................................211
Figure 55 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End. ..........................................................212
Figure 56 Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End...............................................................212
Figure 57 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 & STD930 C, D, G,
H, K, and L and STD974 ...................................................................................................................214
Figure 58 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models Models STD924 & STD930 A, B, E, F, and J.....................217
Figure 59 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body...............................................219
Figure 60 Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies............................................................................................221
Figure 61 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter Body......................................................................................222
Figure 62 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body. ................................................................................................223
Figure 63 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body. ..................................................................224
Figure 64 High Temperature Meter Body. .........................................................................................................226
Figure 65 SFC Smart Field Communicator and Accessories. ............................................................................228
Figure B-1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid...............238
Figure B-2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid.................239
Figure B-3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow. .......................................................................................................240
Figure B-4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals.....................241
Figure B-5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal.............................242
Figure B-6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and
Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and Control.............................................................................243
Figure B-7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and
Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control. ..................................................................................244
Figure B-8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating...247
Figure B-9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating. ........248
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tables
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family..................................................................................................6
SFC Model Differences........................................................................................................................9
Local Smart Meter Available Options................................................................................................13
Start-up Tasks Reference....................................................................................................................16
Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluids)............................................20
Transmitter Overpressure Ratings......................................................................................................21
Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack.........................................................................................22
Local Smart Meter Specifications. .....................................................................................................24
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket......................................................................................27
Table 10 Zero Corrects Procedure for STD110.................................................................................................32
Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter.................................................................................36
Table 12 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Process ...........................................................................39
Table 13 Process Connections...........................................................................................................................40
Table 14 Flange Description .............................................................................................................................41
Table 15 Installing Flange Adapter ...................................................................................................................42
Table 16 Wiring the Transmitter .......................................................................................................................45
Table 17 Starting Communications with Transmitter........................................................................................51
Table 18 Confirming Mode of Operation and Identifying Software Versions..................................................54
Table 19 Changing Mode of Operation.............................................................................................................57
Table 20 Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters ............................................................63
Table 21 Entering Tag Number.........................................................................................................................71
Table 22 Selecting Output Conformity .............................................................................................................73
Table 23 Adjusting Damping Time...................................................................................................................76
Table 24 Pre-Programmed Engineering Units for Selection .............................................................................78
Table 25 Keying in LRV and URV...................................................................................................................80
Table 26 Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures......................................................................................82
Table 27 Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments .......................................................84
Table 28 Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication......................................................................................91
Table 29 Selecting Message Format..................................................................................................................94
Table 30 Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC.............................................................97
Table 31 Smart Meter Pushbutton Description ...............................................................................................103
Table 32 Smart Meter Engineering Units Code ..............................................................................................105
Table 33 Selecting Engineering Units.............................................................................................................106
Table 34 Smart Meter Restrictions for Setting Display Values.......................................................................109
Table 35 Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display..................................................................110
Table 36 Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display....................................................................114
Table 37 Startup Procedure Reference............................................................................................................124
Table 38 Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source Mode......................................................................125
Table 39 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC .......................................................128
Table 40 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC..................................................131
Table 41 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank..................................134
Table 42 Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank ...........................137
Table 43 Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC........................141
Table 44 Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC..................................................145
Table 45 Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with SFC.............148
Table 46 Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access........................................................................152
Table 47 Cutting Failsafe Direction Jumper....................................................................................................156
Table 48 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area ....................................................................................................157
Table 49 Saving and Restoring a Database .....................................................................................................160
x
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tables
Table 50 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51....................................................................163
Table 51 Summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications. ......................................................................165
Table 52 Possible Smart Meter Error Codes. ..................................................................................................166
Table 53 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms ..................................................................................171
Table 54 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings...................................................................................................174
Table 55 Replacing PWA................................................................................................................................175
Table 56 Replacing Meter Body Only.............................................................................................................178
Table 57 Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode ............................................................185
Table 58 Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC.....................................................................................189
Table 59 Resetting Calibration Data With SFC ..............................................................................................193
Table 60 Clearing the # Symbol from the SFC Display..................................................................................197
Table 61 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures...........................................................199
Table 62 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures...................................................................200
Table 63 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors ........................................................200
Table 64 Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Invalid Key Entry Errors.....................................................201
Table 65 Summary of Interrupt Messages For SFC Display...........................................................................201
Table 66 Running a Status Check With SFC ..................................................................................................202
Table 67 Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table.........................................................................................203
Table 68 Running SFC Display and Keyboard Test .......................................................................................207
Table 69 Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference. ........................................................................211
Table 70 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figures 55 and 56......................................................................213
Table 71 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57...................................................................................215
Table 72 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 58...................................................................................218
Table 73 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59...................................................................................219
Table 74 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body..................220
Table 75 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 60...................................................................................221
Table 76 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 61...................................................................................222
Table 77 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 62...................................................................................223
Table 78 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 63...................................................................................225
Table 79 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64...................................................................................226
Table 80 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 65...................................................................................229
Table 81 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts ..........................................................................................230
Table B-1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems...........................................................................246
Table B-2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values.........................................................................250
Table D-1 Factory Mutual (FM) Entity Parameters ..........................................................................................257
Table D-2 CSA Entity Parameters.....................................................................................................................258
Table D-3 CENELEC / LCIE Certification.......................................................................................................261
Table D-4 Standards Australia (LOSC) Certification........................................................................................262
Table D-5 Zone 2 (Europe) Declaration of Conformity....................................................................................262
Table D-6 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification..........................264
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acronyms
AP.......................................................................................................................... Absolute Pressure
APM .......................................................................................................Advanced Process Manager
AWG .............................................................................................................. American Wire Gauge
DE .................................................................................... Digital Enhanced Communications Mode
DP...................................................................................................................... Differential Pressure
EMI....................................................................................................... Electromagnetic Interference
GP.............................................................................................................................. Gauge Pressure
HP.................................................................................................................................High Pressure
HP.............................................................................................High Pressure Side (DP Transmitter)
inH O ........................................................................................................................Inches of Water
2
LGP ...............................................................................................................In-Line Gauge Pressure
LP ..................................................................................................................................Low Pressure
LP ............................................................................................. Low Pressure Side (DP Transmitter)
LRV.................................................................................................................... Lower Range Value
mA................................................................................................................................. Milliamperes
mmHg............................................................................................................Millimeters of Mercury
NPT .................................................................................................................. National Pipe Thread
PCB .................................................................................................................. Printed Circuit Board
PM.............................................................................................................................Process Manger
PROM......................................................................................... Programmable Read Only Memory
PSI................................................................................................................ Pounds per Square Inch
PSIA ..............................................................................................Pounds per Square Inch Absolute
RFI.......................................................................................................Radio Frequency Interference
SFC..........................................................................................................Smart Field Communicator
TPS.....................................................................................................................TotalPlant Solution
URL..................................................................................................................... Upper Range Limit
URV ....................................................................................................................Upper Range Value
Vdc .....................................................................................................................Volts Direct Current
XMTR ..............................................................................................................................Transmitter
xii
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Assistance
If you encounter a problem with your ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, check to see how your
transmitter is currently configured to verify that all selections are consistent with your application.
If the problem persists, you can reach Honeywell’s Solution Support Center for technical support
by telephone during normal business hours. An engineer will discuss your problem with you.
Please have your complete model number, serial number, and software revision number on hand
for reference. You can find the model and serial numbers on the transmitter nameplates. You can
also view the software version number using the SFC or SCT 3000 software application.
By Telephone
Honeywell Solution Support Center Phone:
1-800-423-9883
(U.S. only)
Outside the U.S. call: 1-602-313-6510
Additional Help
By E-mail
You may also seek additional help by contacting the Honeywell
distributor who supplied your ST 3000 transmitter.
You can also e-mail your technical questions or comments about this
product to:
Honeywell Solution Support Center e-mail: [email protected]
Problem Resolution
If it is determined that a hardware problem exists, a replacement
transmitter or part will be shipped with instructions for returning the
defective unit. Please do not return your transmitter without
authorization from Honeywell’s Solution Support Center or until the
replacement has been received.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1 —Overview - First Time Users Only
Introduction
1.1
Section contents
This section includes these topics:
Section
Topic
See Page
1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................1
1.2 ST 3000 Transmitters.....................................................................2
1.3 Smart Field Communicator.............................................................8
1.4 Transmitter/SFC Order.................................................................11
1.5 Local Smart Meter Options...........................................................13
About this section
This section is intended for users who have never worked with our
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and its companion operator interface device
the hand-held Smart Field Communicator (SFC®) before. It provides
some general information to acquaint you with the ST 3000 transmitter
and the SFC.
ATTENTION
Honeywell also offers the SCT 3000 Smartline Configuration Toolkit
that runs on a variety of Personal Computer (PC) platforms using MS-
DOS 5.0 or higher and Windows 3.1 or higher. It is a bundled Microsoft
Windows software and PC-interface hardware solution that allows
quick, error-free configuration of Honeywell Smartline field
instruments. Some SCT 3000 features include:
• Preconfigured templates that simplify configuration and allow rapid
development of configuration databases.
• Context-sensitive help and an on-line user manual.
• Extensive menus and prompts that minimize the need for prior
training or experience.
• The ability to load previously configured databases at time of
installation.
• Automatic verification of device identification and database
configuration menus and prompts for bench set up and calibration.
• The ability to save unlimited transmitter databases on the PC.
SCT 3000 Release 3.12.2 or greater is compatible with our latest Series
100 and 900, Release 300, ST 3000 transmitters. Please contact your
Honeywell representative for more information.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters
About the transmitter
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter comes in a variety of models for
measurement applications involving one of these basic types of
pressure:
• Differential Pressure
• Gauge Pressure
• Absolute Pressure
The transmitter measures the process pressure and transmits an output
signal proportional to the measured variable over a 4 to 20 milliampere,
two-wire loop. Its major components are an electronics housing and a
meter body as shown in Figure 1 for a typical differential pressure
model transmitter.
Figure 1
Typical ST 3000 Differential Pressure Transmitter.
Electronics
Housing
Meter Body
The ST 3000 can transmit its output in either an analog 4 to 20
milliampere format or a digital DE protocol format for direct digital
communications with our TPS system, Allen-Bradley PLCs and other
control systems.
Continued on next page
2
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued
About the transmitter,
continued
Besides the process variable (PV) output, the transmitter also provides
its meter body temperature as a secondary variable which is only
available as a read-only parameter through the SFC when the transmitter
is in its analog mode. See Figure 2.
Figure 2
Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Analog Mode of Operation.
Factory
Characterization
Data
Electronics Housing
Meter Body
PROM
DP or PP
Sensor
Temperature
Sensor
Microprocessor
D/A
A/D
Proportional 4 to
20 mA PV output.
(Digital signal
imposed during
SFC
Static Pressure
Sensor
Digital I/O
communications)
Modular Electronics
Terminal Block
Pressure
When the transmitter is in its DE mode, the process variable is available
for monitoring and control purposes; and the meter body temperature is
also available as a secondary variable for monitoring purposes only.
See Figure 3.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued
Figure 3
Functional Block Diagram for Transmitter in Digital DE Mode of Operation.
Factory
Characterization
Data
Electronics Housing
Meter Body
PROM
DP or PP
Sensor
Temperature
Sensor
Microprocessor
Digital I/O
A/D
Digital signal
broadcasts PV
in floating point
format over
Static Pressure
Sensor
20 mA loop.
Modular Electronics
Terminal Block
Pressure
Series and model
number data
Honeywell’s line of ST 3000 Smart Transmitters includes these two
series designations:
• Series 100
• Series 900
Each series includes several models to meet various process pressure
measurement and interface requirements. Each transmitter comes with a
nameplate located on the top of the electronics housing that lists its given
“model number”. The model number format consists of a Key Number
with several Table selections as shown below.
Key Number
Table I
Table II
Table III Table IV
X X X X
S T D 1 2 0 E 1 H 0 0 0 0 0
S B 1 C
,
Continued on next page
4
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued
Series and model
number data,
continued
You can quickly identify what series and basic type of transmitter you
have from the third and fourth digits in the key number. The letter in the
third digit represents one of these basic transmitter types:
A = Absolute Pressure
D = Differential Pressure
F = Flange Mounted
G = Gauge Pressure
R = Remote Seals
The number in the fourth digit matches the first digit in the transmitter
Series. Thus, a “1” means the transmitter is a Series 100 and a “9” is a
Series 900.
For a complete breakdown of the Table selections in your model
number, please refer to the appropriate Specification and Model
Selection Guide that is provided as a separate document. However, a
description of the available Table III options is given in Appendix A of
this manual for handy reference.
ATTENTION
Previous models of the ST 3000 transmitter with designations of Series
100, Series 100e, Series 600, and Series 900 have been supplied at
various times since the ST 3000 was introduced in 1983. While all these
transmitters are functionally alike, there are differences in housing and
electronics design. This manual only applies for Release 300, Series 100
transmitters with software version 3.0 or greater and Release 300, Series
900 transmitters with software version b.0 or greater. See the procedure
on page 50 to use the SFC to check your transmitter’s software version.
Release 300 transmitters can be identified by the “R300” designation on
the nameplate.
Transmitter
adjustments
Except for optional zero and span adjustments, the ST 3000 has no
physical adjustments. You need an SFC to make any adjustments in an
ST 3000 transmitter. Alternately, certain adjustments can be made
through the Universal Station if the transmitter is digitally integrated
with a Honeywell TPS system; or through a PC running Honeywell
SCT 3000 software.
ST 3000 Transmitters
presently available
Table 1 illustrates the present ST 3000 pressure transmitter family.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued
Table 1
ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family.
Transmitter Type
Series 100 Model
Series 900 Model
Differential
STD1xx
STD9xx
Pressure
Differential Pressure
with Flange on One
Side
STF1xx
STF9xx
Dual-Head Gauge
Pressure
Not Available
STG9xx
In-Line Gauge and
Absolute Pressure
STG1xL
STA1xL
STG9xL
STA9xL
Gauge and Absolute
Pressure
STG1xx
STA1xx
STG9xx
STA9xx
Continued on next page
6
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2
ST 3000 Smart Transmitters, Continued
Table 1
ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Family, continued.
Transmitter Type
Series 100 Model
Series 900 Model
Flange-Mount
STF1xx
STF9xx
Liquid Level
Differential Pressure
with Remote
STR1xx
STR9xx
Diaphragm Seals
Flush Mount
Not Available
STG93P
STG14T
STF14T
High Temperature
Not Available
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3
Smart Field Communicator
About SFC
communications
The portable, battery-powered SFC serves as the common communication
interface device for Honeywell’s family of Smartline Transmitters. It
communicates with a transmitter through serial digital signals over the 4
to 20 milliampere line used to power the transmitter. A request/response
format is the basis for the communication operation. The transmitter’s
microprocessor receives a communication signal from the SFC, identifies
the request, and sends a response message.
Figure 4 shows a simplified view of the communication interface provided
by an SFC.
Figure 4
Typical SFC Communication Interface.
Response
Power
Supply and
Receiver
4 to 20 mA line
Request
SFC
STR3001
ST 3000
Purpose of SFC
The SFC allows you to adjust transmitter values, or diagnose potential
problems from a remote location such as the control room. You can use
the SFC to:
• Configure:
Define and enter the transmitter’s operating parameters
including
– range values,
– output conformity,
– damping time,
– tag number (ID), and more
Read the input pressure to the transmitter in
engineering units and the transmitter’s output in
percent.
• Monitor:
• Display:
Retrieve and display data from the transmitter or SFC
memory.
• Change Mode
of Operation: Tell transmitter to operate in either its analog (4-20
mA) mode or its digital enhanced (DE) mode.
Continued on next page
8
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3
Smart Field Communicator, Continued
Purpose of SFC,
continued
• Check Current
Output:
Use the transmitter to supply the output current
for verifying analog loop operation, troubleshooting,
or calibrating other components in the analog loop.
desired
• Troubleshoot: Check status of transmitter operation and display
diagnostic messages to identify transmitter,
communication, or operator error problems.
SFC model
differences
As Honeywell’s family of Smartline Transmitters has evolved, the SFC
has been changed to meet new model and functionality requirements.
Besides different software versions, some major differences exist
between these four SFC model designations.
• STS100
• STS101
• STS102
• STS103
Table 2 summarizes the differences between the four SFC models for
reference.
Table 2
SFC Model Differences
If SFC
model is. . .
Then it is compatible
with. . .
And additional functions
include . . .
Analog only ST 3000 smart Not applicable
pressure transmitters
STS100
Analog only ST 3000 smart Corrects Reset, Failsafe Direction
STS101
pressure transmitters, if
and Sensor Temperature
SFC software version is less indication.
than 5.0.
Analog and Digital (DE)
mode ST 3000 pressure
transmitters and STT 3000
temperature transmitters, if
Changing the mode from analog
to digital or digital to analog,
configuration parameters for STT
3000 and scratch pad
SFC software version is 5.0 configuration area for ST 3000.
or greater.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3
Smart Field Communicator, Continued
SFC model
differences, continued
Table 2
SFC Model Differences, continued
If SFC
model is. . .
Then it is compatible
with. . .
And additional functions
include . . .
Analog and Digital (DE)
mode ST 3000 pressure
transmitters, STT 3000
temperature transmitters,
and MagneW 3000
Changing the mode from analog
to digital or digital to analog.
Configuration parameters for
Magnew 3000 as well as scratch
pad configuration area.
STS102
electromagnetic flowmeters.
Same as STS102 plus new Two-line, 16-character per line
STS103
multivariable transmitters -
SCM 3000 Smart Coriolis
Flowmeter and SGC 3000
Smart Gas Chromatograph.
display. Made “SAVE” and
“RESTORE” functions part of
configuration menu instead of
dedicated keys. Configuration
parameters for SCM 3000 and
SGC 3000.
SMV 3000 Smart
Configuration parameters for
SMV 3000
Multivariable Transmitters, if
SFC software version is 4.2
or greater.
SMV 3000 configuration
parameters for superheated steam
algorithm and thermocouple
inputs.
SMV 3000 with superheated
steam algorithm and
thermocouple input, if SFC
software version is 4.4 or
greater.
Local Smart Meter configuration
parameters.
Release 300 Series 100 and
900 ST 3000 pressure
transmitters, if SFC software
version is 5.0 or greater.
The keystroke actions and prompt displays referenced in this manual are
for the SFC model STS103. While the SFC model STS103 does have a
two-line instead of a one-line display, many of the basic keystrokes and
configuration parameter prompts for ST 3000 pressure transmitters are
identical to those in the model STS102.
ATTENTION
If you will be using a model STS102 SFC, you must refer to the SFC
Smart Field Communicator Operating Guide 34-ST-11-10 for keystroke
details. But, be aware that transmitter functions will be limited to only
those that are supported by the Model STS102 SFC.
10
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4
Transmitter/SFC Order
Order components
Figure 5 shows the components that would be shipped and received for
a typical ST 3000 transmitter and SFC order.
Figure 5
Typical ST 3000 Transmitter and SFC Order Components.
Ordered
Š Series 100 ST 3000 Differential pressure transmitter with optional mounting bracket
Š Smart Field Communicator with optional battery charger
Received
Shipped
ST 3000
ST 3000
Installation
Guide
Mounting Bracket (Optional)
Quick
Reference
Guide
ST 3000
User'sManual
Shipped
separately,
if ordered
SFC
Operating
SFC
Pocket
Card
Guide
Battery
Leads
Pack
Battery
Charger
(optional)
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4
Transmitter/SFC Order, Continued
About documentation
Various documents are available for reference describing how to install,
configure and operate the ST 3000 transmitter:
• ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Installation Guide Using SFC Model
STS103 34-ST-33-39: One copy is shipped with every transmitter.
This document provides information for checking, installing, and
wiring the ST 3000 transmitter for operation.
• ST 3000 Smart Transmitter and SFC Smart Field Communicator
Model STS 103 User’s Manual 34-ST-25-14: One or more copies are
sent to the address designated on the order when specified. This
document provides detailed information for installing, wiring,
configuring, starting up, operating, maintaining, and servicing the ST
3000 transmitter. This is the main reference manual for the ST 3000
transmitter and it overlaps some data in the previously listed
Installation Guide 34-ST-33-39 and in the following Operating Guide
34-ST-11-14 to minimize cross reference.
• ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Quick Reference Guide 34-ST-09-06:
Shipped with User’s Manual. This document provides abbreviated
versions of procedures for installing, wiring, configuring, calibrating
and troubleshooting the ST 3000 transmitter for quick reference.
• Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Pocket Card 34-ST-11-15:
One card is shipped with every SFC. This card provides quick
reference of keystroke actions for selected transmitter interface tasks.
• Smart Field Communicator Model STS103 Operating Guide 34-ST-
11-14: One copy is shipped with every SFC. This document provides
detailed SFC information and keystroke actions for interfacing with
these Honeywell Smartline Transmitters.
– ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitter (Non Release 300 models)
– STT 3000 Smart Temperature Transmitter
– MagneW 3000 Smart Electromagnetic Flowmeter
– SMV 3000 Smart Multivariable Transmitter
• Smartline Configuration Toolkit SCT 3000 Installation and Start-up
Guide 34-ST-10-08: One copy is shipped when the SCT 3000
software application is ordered.
12
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5
Local Smart Meter Options
Option availability
Depending upon your transmitter model, it can be equipped with one of
the available Local Smart Meter and/or Zero and Span Adjust options as
shown in Table 3.
Table 3
Local Smart Meter Available Options
Option Description
Available with Transmitter Series
100
900
Local Smart Meter only
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
Yes
Yes
0
100
%
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span Adjustments
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
Yes *
Yes
0
%
100
SPAN
ZERO
UNITS
SET
LOWER
VALUE
Local Zero and Span Adjustments only
Yes *
Yes
SPAN
ZERO
* Except draft range, model STD110
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5
Local Smart Meter Options, Continued
About the options
Each Local Smart Meter and/or Zero and Span Adjust option comes as a
separate assembly mounted on the transmitter’s Printed Wiring
Assembly (PWA) mounting bracket. The meter option assembly
includes a cable and plug assembly for mating with a connector on the
transmitter’s PWA. A meter end-cap which includes a window is
supplied on the electronics side of the transmitter’s housing so you can
view the meter display with the end cap installed. See Figure 6.
Figure 6
ST 3000 with Local Smart Meter Option.
Electronics
Housing
Local Smart
Meter Option
14
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2 —Quick Start Reference
2.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics:
Section
Topic
See Page
2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................15
2.2 Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly .............................16
About this section
This section assumes that the ST 3000 transmitter has been installed and
wired correctly, and is ready to be put into operation. It also assumes
that you are somewhat familiar with using the SFC and that the
transmitter has been configured correctly for your application. If the
transmitter has not been installed and wired, you are not familiar with
SFC operation, and/or you do not know if the transmitter is configured
correctly, please read the other sections of this manual before starting up
your transmitter.
This section provides a list of typical start-up tasks and tells you where
you can find detailed information about performing the task.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2
Getting ST 3000 Transmitter On-Line Quickly
Quick start-up tasks
Table 4 lists common start-up tasks for an ST 3000 transmitter using an
SFC and gives an appropriate section in this manual to reference for
more information about how to do the task. The start-up tasks are listed
in the order they are commonly completed.
Table 4
Start-up Tasks Reference
Task
Description
Reference Section
Put analog loop into manual
mode.
Appropriate vendor documentation
for controller or recorder used as a
receiver in analog loop with
ST 3000 transmitter.
1
Connect SFC to transmitter and 5.2
establish communications.
2
Check or set tag ID.
6.3
5.3
3
4
Identify transmitter’s mode of
operation.
Change mode of operation, if
required.
5.4
6.4
6.5
5
6
Check/set output form
(Linear/Square Root).
Check/set damping time.
7
8
Check/set Lower Range Value
and Upper Range Value.
6.7 (See 6.8 for local zero and
span adjustments)
Run optional output check for
analog loop.
7.3
9
Check zero input and set, if
required.
7.4 - See Step 9 in Table 39.
7.8 - See Step 9 in Table 43.
8.2
10
Check transmitter status.
11
12
Setup local Smart Meter, if
applicable.
6.11 or 6.12
Write data in scratch pad
memory, if desired.
8.4
13
14
Store all changes in the
transmitter's non-volatile
memory by pressing [SHIFT] and
[ENTER].
6.13
16
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 —Preinstallation Considerations
Introduction
3.1
Section Contents
This section includes these topics:
Section
Topic
See Page
3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................17
3.2 CE Conformity (Europe) Notice....................................................18
3.3 Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter ......................................19
3.4 Considerations for SFC................................................................22
3.5 Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option ..............................24
About this section
This section reviews things you should take into consideration before
you install the transmitter and start using the SFC. Of course, if you are
replacing an existing ST 3000 transmitter and you did not order a new
SFC; you can skip this section.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2
CE Conformity (Europe) Notice
About conformity and
special conditions
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of
89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of this product with any
other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.
Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and
the following special conditions, may invalidate this product’s
conformity with the EMC Directive.
• You must use shielded, twisted-pair cable such as Belden 9318 for all
signal/power wiring.
• You must connect the shield to ground at the power supply side of the
wiring only and leave it insulated at the transmitter side.
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated
in an industrial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area may cause harmful interference. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to
radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30
meters (98 feet) to the antenna(e). In special cases, when highly
susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may have to
employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the
electromagnetic emissions of this equipment.
18
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3
Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter
Evaluate conditions
The ST 3000 transmitter is designed to operate in common indoor
industrial environments as well as outdoors. To assure optimum
performance, evaluate these conditions at the mounting area relative to
published transmitter specifications and accepted installation practices
for electronic pressure transmitters.
• Environmental Conditions
– Ambient Temperature
– Relative Humidity
• Potential Noise Sources
– Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)
– Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
• Vibration Sources
– Pumps
– Motorized Valves
– Valve Cavitation
• Process Characteristics
– Temperature
– Maximum Pressure Rating
Figure 7 illustrates typical mounting area considerations to make before
installing a transmitter.
Figure 7
Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation
Lightning
(EMI)
Relative
Humidity
Ambient
Temperature
Large Fan Motors
(EMI)
Transceivers
(RFI)
Pump
Meter Body
(vibration)
Temperature
21003
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3
Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Temperature limits
Table 5 lists the operating temperature limits for the various types of
transmitters with silicone fill fluids. See transmitter specifications for
temperature limits of ST 3000 transmitters with alternative fill fluids.
Table 5
Operating Temperature Limits (Transmitters with Silicone Fill Fluids)
Transmitter Type and Model
Ambient Temperature
Process Interface Temperature
°C
°F
°C
°F
Draft Range STD110
-40 to 70
-40 to 85
-40 to 93
-40 to 158
-40 to 185
-40 to 200
-40 to 70
-40 to 85
-40 to 125
-40 to 158
-40 to 185
-40 to 257
Differential Pressure STD125
STD120, STD130, STD170
STD904, STD924,
STD930, STD974
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
Gauge Pressure
STG140, STG170, STG180,
STG14L, STG17L, STG18L
-40 to 93
-40 to 93
-15 to 65
-40 to 85
-40 to 200
-40 to 200
5 to 149
-40 to 125
-40 to 257
-40 to 302 †
5 to 203 ††
-40 to 257
STG14T
STG93P
STG944, STG974
-40 to 150 †
-15 to 95 ††
-40 to 125
-40 to 185
STG90L, STG94L,
STG97L, STG98L
-40 to 85
-40 to 93
-40 to 93
-40 to 85
-40 to 85
-40 to 185
-40 to 200
-40 to 200
-40 to 185
-40 to 185
-40 to 110
-40 to 230
Absolute PressureSTA122/12L
STA140/14L
See Specification Sheet
-40 to 80 -40 to 176
See Specification Sheet
STA922/92L
STA940/94L
-40 to 80
-40 to 176
Flange Mounted
STF128, STF132, STF924,
STF932
-40 to 93
-40 to 200
-40 to 175
-40 to 350
Pseudo-Flanged Head
STF12F, STF13F, STF92F,
STF93F
-40 to 93
-40 to 85
-40 to 200
-40 to 185
-40 to 93
-40 to 85
-40 to 200
-40 to 185
STF14F
Gauge Pressure Flange Mount
STF14T
-40 to 93
-40 to 200
-40 to 150 †
-40 to 302 †
Remote Diaphragm Seals
STR12D, STR13D, STR14G,
STR17G, STR14A
See Specification Sheet
-40 to 85 -40 to 185
See Specification Sheet
See Specification Sheet
STR93D, STR94G
†
Process temperatures above 125 °C (257 °F) require a reduction in the maximum ambient temperature as follows:
Process Temperature
150 °C (302 °F)
140 °C (284 °F)
125 °C (257 °F)
Ambient Temperature Limit
50 °C (122 °F)
60 °C (140 °F)
85 °C (185 °F)
†† Process temperatures above 65 °C (149 °F) require a 1:1 reduction in maximum ambient temperature.
NOTE: For transmitters with local meter option see Table 8.
NOTE: Transmitters with other fill fluids (CTFE, Neobee, Etc.) have different Operating Temperature Limits. For
more specific information, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide or transmitter nameplate
20
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3
Considerations for ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Pressure ratings
Table 6 lists maximum working pressure for a given transmitter Upper
Range Limit (URL).
The maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) is the pressure
used for the approval body safety calculations.
Table 6
Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) Ratings
Transmitter Type
Upper Range Limit
(URL)
MAWP
50 psi (3.5 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
Draft Range
10 inches H2O (25
mbar)
Differential Pressure
400 inches H2O (1 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
Gauge Pressure
300 psi (21 bar)
500 psi (35 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
6000 psi (415 bar)
10000 psi (690 bar)
400 inches H2O (1 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
300 psi (21 bar)
500 psi (35 bar)
3000 psi (210 bar)
6000 psi (415 bar)
10000 psi (690 bar)
Per selected flange
and material
(ANSI/ASME 150#,
300#, DN PN40)
Flange Mount
Remote Seal
400 inches H2O (1 bar)
100 psi (7 bar)
Lesser MAWP of
either Remote Seal
selected or transmitter
pressure rating
Absolute Pressure
780 mmHg Absolute
(1 bar)
780 mmHg Absolute
(1 bar)
500 psia (35 bar)
500 psia (35 bar)
Note: Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP) may vary with materials of construction and process
temperature. For more specific information, refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection
Guide or transmitter nameplate
NOTE: To convert bar values to kilopascals (kPa), multiply by 100.
For example, 3.5 bar equals 350 kPa.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4
Considerations for SFC
Install SFC battery
pack
If the SFC battery pack was removed for shipping and/or storage, you
will have to install the battery pack and charge the batteries before you
can operate the SFC.
The procedure in Table 7 outlines the steps for the battery pack.
Table 7
Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack
Step
Action
Turn SFC face down on working surface. Use metric hex wrench
(2.5 mm) to remove screws in battery compartment cover and
remove cover.
1
2
Insert battery pack in compartment and connect plug in compartment
to pin on battery back
Example - Battery pack installation.
Battery Pack
Hex Screws
21004
Replace cover and tighten hex screws
3
4
Connect lead from battery charger to recessed connector on left side
of SFC.
WARNING
The SFC battery charger is not intrinsically safe.
Always recharge the SFC battery pack in a nonhazardous location.
The SFC itself is an intrinsically safe device.
Continued on next page
22
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4
Considerations for SFC, Continued
Install SFC battery
pack, continued
Table 7 Installing and Charging SFC Battery Pack, continued
Step
5
Action
Plug battery charger into any standard 120 Vac outlet or universal-
European 240 Vac outlet as applicable for charger power rating. If
240 Vac charger is supplied with stripped leads instead of universal-
European plug, lead identification for 240 Vac charger is as follows.
Lead Color…
Blue
Brown
Function…
Neutral
Hot
Green/Yellow
Ground
ATTENTION
It takes up to 16 hours to fully recharge the battery
pack and you can use the SFC continuously for up to 24 hours
before the battery pack needs recharging.
Temperature Limits
Usage guidelines
The ambient operating temperature limits for the SFC are –10 to 50°C
(14 to 122°F) with relative humidity in the range of 10 to 90% RH.
• For transmitters operating in the Analog Mode, be sure to put an
analog control loop into its manual mode before initiating SFC
communications with the transmitter. Also, be sure any switches that
may trip alarms or interlocks associated with the analog loop are
secured or turned OFF. Communication superimposes digital signals
on the loop wiring that could affect the analog control signal.
• Be sure the power supply voltage does not exceed 45Vdc.
The ST 3000 transmitter and SFC were designed to operate with
voltages below 45Vdc.
• Be sure there is at least 250 ohms of resistance between the SFC and
the power supply for proper communications.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5
Considerations for Local Smart Meter Option
Reference
specifications
Table 8 lists pertinent Smart Meter specifications for reference.
Table 8
Local Smart Meter Specifications.
Operating Conditions —————
Parameter
Rated
Extreme, Transportation and
Storage
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
°F
°C
–40 to 176
–40 to 80
–58 to 194
–50 to 90
%RH
10 to 90
0 to 100
Design ———————————
Accuracy
No error. Reproduces transmitter signal exactly within its resolution.
Bargraph ±3% of reading Shown as:
Display Resolution
Digital Readout ±0.005 for ±19.99 reading range,
19.99
±0.05 for ±199.9 reading range,
±0.5 for ±1999 reading range,
±5 for ±19990 reading range,
±50 for ±199900 reading range,
±500 for ±1999000 reading range,
±5000 for ±19990000 reading range.
199.9
1999
19.99 K
199.9 K
1999 K
19990 K
Display Update Rate
Above 32°F (0°C): ½ second
@ or below 32°F (0°C): 1½ seconds
Meter Display at High
and Low Temperature
Extremes
The rated temperature limits for the local meter are listed above and are
true in that no damage to the meter will occur over these temperatures,
however the readability of the LCD is affected if taken to these
temperature extremes:
• The LCD will turn black at some temperature between 80 to 90 °C
(176 and 194 °F), rendering the display unreadable. This effect is
only temporary, and normally occurs at 90 °C (194 °F).
• At low temperatures, the update rate of the display is lengthened to
1.5 seconds due to the slower response time of the display. At -20
°C (-4 °F) the display becomes unreadable due to slow response of
the LCD. This is also only temporary and normal readability will
return when temperature returns above -20 °C (-4 °F).
24
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 —Installation
4.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics:
Section
Topic
See Page
4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................25
4.2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter.....................................................26
4.3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter..........................................................36
4.4 Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter .........................................................41
About this section
This section provides information about installing the ST 3000
transmitter. It includes procedures for mounting, piping and wiring the
transmitter for operation.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter
Summary
You can mount all transmitter models (except flush mount models and
those with integral flanges) to a 2-inch (50 millimeter) vertical or
horizontal pipe using our optional angle or flat mounting bracket, or a
bracket of your own. Flush mount models are mounted directly to the
process pipe or tank by a 1” weld nipple. Those models with integral
flanges are supported by the flange connection.
Figure 8 shows typical bracket mounted and flange mounted transmitter
installations for comparison.
Figure 8
Typical Bracket Mounted and Flange Mounted Installations
Angle
Mounting
Bracket
Flat
Mounting
Bracket
Horizontal Pipe
Tank
Wall
Flange
Connection
Transmitter
Flange
24118
Continued on next page
26
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Dimensions
Detailed dimension drawings for given transmitter series and types are
listed in the back of the Installation Guide (Part number 34-ST-33-39)
for reference. Note that abbreviated overall dimensions are also shown
in the Specification Sheets for the given transmitter models.
This section assumes that the mounting dimensions have already been
taken into account and the mounting area can accommodate the
transmitter.
Bracket mounting
Table 9 summarizes typical steps for mounting a transmitter to a
bracket.
Table 9
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket
Step
Action
1
If you are using an…
Then…
optional mounting bracket
existing mounting bracket
go to Step 2.
go to Step 3.
Position bracket on 2-inch (50.8 mm) horizontal or vertical pipe, and
install “U” bolt around pipe and through holes in bracket. Secure with
nuts and lockwashers provided.
2
Example - Angle mounting bracket secured to horizontal or vertical
pipe.
Nuts and
Lockwashers
Nuts and
Lockwashers
Mounting
Bracket
U-Bolt
Mounting
Bracket
Horizontal Pipe
Vertical Pipe
U-Bolt
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Bracket mounting,
continued
Table 9
Step
3
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket, continued
Action
Align appropriate mounting holes in transmitter with holes in bracket
and secure with bolts and washers provided.
If transmitter is …
DP type with double ended
process heads and/or
remote seals
Then …
use alternate mounting
holes in end of heads.
GP and AP with single-
ended head
use mounting holes in side
of meter body.
In-line GP and AP
(STGxxL and STAxxL)
use smaller “U” bolt
provided to attach meter
body to bracket.
See figure below.
Dual-head GP and AP
use mounting holes in end
of process head.
Example – Inline model transmitter mounted to optional angle
mounting bracket.
Inline models
Meter Body
Smaller
“U” bolt
Use bracket for
hexagonal meter body
NOTE: If the meter body is hexagonal, you must use the additional
bracket supplied. If meter body is round, discard the
bracket.
Continued on next page
28
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Bracket mounting,
continued
Table 9
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter to a Bracket, continued
Loosen set screw on outside neck of transmitter one full turn. Rotate
electronics housing a maximum of 180 degrees in left or right
direction from center to the position you require and tighten set screw
4
.
(13 to 15 lb-in/1.46 to 1.68 N m).
Example - Rotating electronics housing.
Electronics
Housing
180 degrees
max.
180 degrees
max.
Set Screw
ATTENTION
The metric socket head wrench kit supplied with the
SFC includes 2.5, 3, and 4mm size wrenches. You will need the
4mm size wrench for the outside set screw.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
The mounting position of a model STA122, STA922, STA12L, or
STA92L Absolute Pressure Transmitter or a model STD110 Draft
Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is critical as the transmitter
spans become smaller. A maximum zero shift of 2.5 mm Hg for an
absolute transmitter or
ATTENTION
1.5 inH O for a draft range transmitter can result from a mounting
2
position which is rotated 90 degrees from vertical. A typical zero shift of
0.12 mm Hg or 0.20 in H O can occur for a 5 degree rotation from
2
vertical.
Precautions for
Mounting
Transmitters with
Small Absolute or
Differential Pressure
Spans
To minimize these positional effects on calibration (zero shift), take the
appropriate mounting precautions that follow for the given transmitter
model.
For a model STA122, STA922, STA12L, or STA92L transmitter, you
must ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it. You do
this by leveling the transmitter side-to-side and front-to-back. See
Figure 9 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit
balance.
Figure 9
Leveling an Absolute Pressure Transmitter.
Leveling Absolute Pressure models
Center
Section
Process
Head
Position spirit balance on
center section of meter
body only.
Cont’d
Continued on next page
30
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued
Figure 9 Leveling an Absolute Pressure Transmitter (cont’d)
Leveling Inline models
Mount transmitter vertically to assure best accuracy. Position spirit balance on pressure connection surface
of AP body.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Precautions for
Mounting
Transmitters with
Small Absolute or
Differential Pressure
Spans, continued
For a transmitter with a small differential pressure span, you must
ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it. You do this by
leveling the transmitter side-to-side and front-to-back. See Figure 9 for
suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance. You
must also zero the transmitter by following the steps in Table 10 below.
Table 10
Zero Corrects Procedure for STD110
Step
Action
Attach the transmitter to the mounting bracket but do not completely
tighten the mounting bolts
1
2
Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure
(HP) and low pressure (LP) heads to eliminate the affects of any
surrounding air currents.
Connect 24 Vdc power to the transmitter and connect a digital
voltmeter or SFC to read the transmitter’s output. See Figures 18
and 38 for typical SFC connection or connect a voltmeter across the
250 ohm resistor, if desired.
3
Use the SFC and establish communications with the transmitter.
Follow the steps in Table 17, if needed.
4
5
While reading the transmitter’s output on an SFC or a voltmeter,
position the transmitter so the output reading is at or near zero and
then completely tighten the mounting bolts.
Perform an input zero correct function using the SFC and following
the steps below. This corrects the transmitter for any minor error that
may occur after the mounting bolts are tightened.
6
7
^
SHIFT
Initiate shift key selection. Press
key
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Press
Press
key. Read applied input pressure.
RESET
K
COR-
RECT
key. Prompt asks if the applied input pressure equals
zero input. If it is zero input, go to next keystroke. If it is not, press
[CLR] key to exit function and repeat keystrokes.
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
Press
key. Zero input is set equal to applied input pressure.
Remove the tube from between the input connections, the power,
and the digital voltmeter or SFC.
8
9
Continue with the remaining installation tasks.
Continued on next page
32
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Flange mounting
ATTENTION
To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitter’s
flange to the flange pipe on the wall of the tank.
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the
flange extension.
Figure 10 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with the flange
on the high pressure (HP) side so the HP diaphragm is in direct contact
with the process fluid. The low pressure (LP) side of the transmitter is
vented to atmosphere (no connection).
It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for the
transmitter’s service condition.
To prevent degradation of performance in Flush-Mounted Flanged Transmitters, exercise care to ensure
that the internal diameter of the flange gasket does not obstruct the sensing diaphragm.
To prevent degradation of performance in Extended Mount Flanged Transmitters, ensure that there
is sufficient clearance in front of the sensing diaphragm body.
Figure 10
Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation
Attention: Dotted area indicates use
with closed tank with reference leg.
Maximum Level
Variable
Head H1
Reference
Leg
Minimum Level
HP Side
mounted
to tank
LP Side vented
to atmosphere
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Flush mounting
To mount a flush mounted model, cut a hole for a 1” standard pipe in
the tank or pipe where the transmitter is to be mounted. Weld the 1”
mounting sleeve to the wall of the tank or to the hole cut on the pipe.
Insert the meter body of the transmitter into the mounting sleeve and
secure with the locking bolt. Tighten the bolt to a torque of 6,4 Nm +/-
0,30 Nm (4.7 ft-lbs +/- 0.2 ft.-lbs.). Figure 11 shows a typical
installation for a transmitter with a flush mount on a pipe.
Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated
to the desired position. See Table 9, Step 4 for details.
ATTENTION
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the
mounting sleeve.
Figure 11
Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation
1” Pipe Mount -
316 SS Weld Nipple
(standard option)
Continued on next page
34
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
High Temperature
Transmitter Mounting
You can mount the High Temperature transmitter directly to the process
flange connection or the process piping. Figure 12 shows typical pipe
and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison.
To mount a flange mounted transmitter model, bolt the transmitter’s
flange to the flange on the wall of the tank or process pipe.
It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and
mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter’s service
condition.
Once the transmitter is mounted, the electronics housing can be rotated
to the desired position. See Table 9, step 4.
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to accommodate the
flange extension.
ATTENTION
Figure 12
Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted Installations
Tank
Wall
Flange
Connection
Transmitter
Flange
Process Pipe
1/2" NPT
Connection
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Remote seal
mounting
Use the procedure in Table 11 to mount a remote diaphragm seal
transmitter model. Figure 13 shows a typical installation for a remote
diaphragm seal transmitter for reference.
Mount the transmitter flanges within the limits stated here for the given
fill-fluid in the capillary tubes with a tank at one atmosphere.
WARNING
IF the fill fluid is…
Silicone DC 200 Oil
THEN mount the flange…
no greater than 22 feet (6.7 meters)
below the transmitter
Silicone DC 704 Oil
Chlorotrifluorethylene
no greater than 19 feet (5.8 meters)
below the transmitter
no greater than 11 feet (3.4 meters)
below the transmitter.
NOTE: The combination of tank vacuum and high pressure capillary
head effect should not exceed 9 psi (300 mm Hg) absolute.
Table 11
Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter
Step
1
Action
Mount transmitter at a remote distance determined by length of
capillary tubing.
2
If Transmitter Model
Number is…
Then Connect Remote
Seal on…
STR93D or STR12D
high pressure (HP) side of
transmitter to lower flange
mounting on tank wall for
variable head H1.
STR13D
low pressure (LP) side of
transmitter to lower flange
mounting on tank wall for
variable head H1.
ATTENTION
accommodate the flange extension.
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to
Continued on next page
36
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2
Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Remote seal
mounting, continued
Table 11
Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter, continued
Step
3
Action
If Transmitter Model
Number is…
Then Connect Remote
Seal on…
STR93D or STR12D
low pressure (LP) side of
transmitter to upper flange
mounting on tank wall for
fixed or constant head H2.
high pressure (HP) side of
transmitter to upper flange
mounting on tank wall for
fixed or constant head H2.
STR13D
ATTENTION
On insulated tanks, remove enough insulation to
accommodate the flange extension.
It is the End User’s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and
mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter’s service
condition
4
Figure 13
Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation.
LP Side
- Model STR93D
- Model STR12D
HP Side
- Model STR13D
Maximum Level
H2
Fixed
Ref. Leg
Variable
Head H1
Minimum Level
HP Side
- Model STR93D
- Model STR12D
LP Side
- Model STR13D
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter
Piping arrangements
The actual piping arrangement will vary depending upon the process
measurement requirements and the transmitter model. Except for
flanged and remote diaphragm seal connections, process connections are
made to ¼ inch or ½ inch NPT female connections in the process head
of the transmitter’s meter body. For example, a differential pressure
transmitter comes with double-ended process heads with ¼ inch NPT
connections but they can be modified to accept ½ inch NPT through
optional flange adapters. Some gauge pressure transmitters may have a
½ inch NPT connection which mounts directly to a process pipe.
The most common type of pipe used is ½ inch schedule 80 steel pipe.
Many piping arrangements use a three-valve manifold to connect the
process piping to the transmitter. A manifold makes it easy to install
and remove or rezero a transmitter without interrupting the process. It
also accommodates the installation of blow-down valves to clear debris
from pressure lines to the transmitter.
Figure 14 shows a diagram of a typical piping arrangement using a
three-valve manifold and blow-down lines for a differential pressure
transmitter being used to measure flow.
Figure 14
Typical 3-Valve Manifold and Blow-Down Piping
Arrangement.
To Downstream Tap
To Upstream Tap
Blow-Down
Blow-Down
3-Valve
Valve
Valve
Manifold
Blow-Down
Piping
Blow-Down
Piping
To Low Pressure
Side of Transmitter
To High Pressure
Side of Transmitter
To Waste
To Waste
21010
Continued on next page
38
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Piping arrangements,
continued
Another piping arrangement uses a block-off valve and a tee connector in
the process piping to the transmitter as shown in Figure 15.
Figure 15
Typical Piping Arrangement for ½” NPT Process Connection
Tank Wall
1/2" NPT
Connection
Block-off Valve
Transmitter location
Table 12 lists the mounting location for the transmitter depending on the
process.
Table 12
Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Process
Process
Suggested Location
Explanation
Gases
Above the gas line
The condensate drains away from
the transmitter.
Liquids
1. Below but close to the
elevation of the process
connection.
1. This minimizes the static head
effect of the condensate.
2. Level with or above the
process connection.
2. This requires a siphon to
protect the transmitter from
process steam. The siphon
retains water as a “fill fluid.”
For liquid or steam, the piping should slope a minimum of 25.4 mm
(1 inch) per 305 mm (1 foot). Slope the piping down towards the
transmitter if the transmitter is below the process connection so the
bubbles may rise back into the piping through the liquid. If the
transmitter is located above the process connection, the piping should rise
vertically above the transmitter; then slope down towards the flowline
with a vent valve at the high point. For gas measurement, use a
condensate leg and drain at the low point (freeze protection may be
required here).
ATTENTION
See Appendix B for some suggested freeze protection solutions.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Continued on next page
4.3
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Care must be taken when installing transmitters on hot processes. The
operating temperature limits for the device (as outlined in Table 5) must
not be exceeded. Impulse piping may be used to reduce the temperature
of the process that comes into contact with the transmitter meter body.
As a general rule there is a 56 degree C drop (100 degree F) in the
temperature of the process for every foot of ½ inch uninsulated piping.
ATTENTION
Process connections Table 13 describes typical process connections for a given type of
transmitter.
Table 13
Process Connections
Transmitter Type
Process Connection
Differential
Pressure
• Process heads with 1/4-inch NPT female connection.
• Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female
connection are optional.
• Models with pseudo flange on one side include 2- or 3-
inch ANSI class 150 flange.
Gauge Pressure
• Process head with 1/2-inch NPT female connection
(Series 100).
• In-line 1/2-inch NPT female connection (STGxxL).
• In-line ½ inch NPT male
• 9/16 AMINCO
• DIN 19213
• Process heads with 1/4-inch NPT female connection
(STG9x4).
• Flange adapters and manifolds with 1/2-inch female
connections are optional (STG9x4).
• 2-inch Sanitary Tri-Clamp (STGxxT)
• Flush mount in 1-inch weld sleeve, with O-ring and
locking bolt (STGxxP).
Absolute Pressure • Process head with 1/2-inch NPT female connection.
(STAx22, x40).
• In-line ½ inch NPT male
• 9/16 AMINCO
• DIN 19213
Flange Mounted
Liquid Level
• Small flange 1/2-inch, 1-, 1 ½ - and 2-inch (STFxxT)
• 2, 3- or 4-inch flange with flush or 2-, 4- or 6-inch
extended diaphragm (See Table 14) on high pressure
side.*
• DN 50, 80, or 100 PN 40 flange with flush or 2, 4 or 6
inch extended diaphragm (See Table 14) on High
Pressure Side*.
Remote
Diaphragm Seals
See Model Selection Guide for description of available
Flanged, Threaded, Chemical Tee, Saddle, and Sanitary
process connections.
* Reference side has standard differential pressure process head.
Continued on next page
40
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Flange descriptions
Table 14 describes the available flange connections for flange mounted
liquid level transmitters.
Table 14 Flange Description
Transmitter Type
Description
Flush or Extended
Diaphragm
2-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 120.7
mm (4.75 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 150 mm (5.91 in).
2-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 127 mm
(5.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).
3-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 152.4
mm (6.00 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7.48 in).
3-inch 300# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 168.3
mm (6.62 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 210 mm (8.27 in).
4-inch 150# serrated–face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 190.5
mm (7.50 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 230 mm (9.05 in).
4-inch 300# serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22.2 mm (7/8 in) diameter on 255
mm (10.04 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).
DN 50 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 4 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 125
mm (4.92 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm (6.50 in).
DN 80 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 8 holes 18 mm (0.71 in) diameter on 160
mm (6.30 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm (7.87 in).
DN 100 PN 40 serrated–face flange with 8 holes 22 mm (0.87 in) diameter on 190
mm (7.48 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 235 mm (9.25 in).
2-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 15.9 mm (5/8 in) diameter on
120.6 mm (4-3/4 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 152.4 mm (6
in).
Pseudo Flange Head
3-inch, 150 lbs serrated-face flange with 4 holes 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter on 152
mm (6 in) diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm (7-1/2 in).
25.4 mm (1” pipe mount) (316L SS standard option.)
Flush Mount
Gauge STG93P
General piping
guidelines
• When measuring fluids containing suspended solids, install
permanent valves at regular intervals to blow-down piping.
• Blow-down all lines on new installations with compressed air or
steam and flush them with process fluids (where possible) before
connecting these lines to the transmitter’s meter body.
• Be sure all the valves in the blow-down lines are closed tight after the
initial blow-down procedure and each maintenance procedure after
that.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3
Piping ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Installing flange
adapter
Table 15 gives the steps for an optional flange adapter on the process
head.
Slightly deforming the gasket supplied with the adapter before you
insert it into the adapter may aid in retaining the gasket in the groove
while you align the adapter to the process head. To deform the gasket,
submerse it in hot water for a few minutes then firmly press it into its
recessed mounting groove in the adapter.
ATTENTION
Table 15
Installing Flange Adapter
Step
Action
Insert filter screen (if supplied) into inlet cavity of process head.
Carefully seat Teflon (white) gasket into adapter groove.
1
2
3
Thread adapter onto 1/2-inch process pipe and align mounting holes
in adapter with holes in end of process head as required.
Secure adapter to process head by hand tightening 7/16-20 hex-
head bolts.
4
Example – Installing adapter on process head.
Process
Head
Filter Screen
Teflon Gasket
Flange Adapter
21011
7/16 x 20 Bolts
ATTENTION
Apply an anti-seize compound on the stainless steel
bolts prior to threading them into the process head.
Evenly torque flange adapter bolts to a torque of 27,1 Nm +/- 1,4 Nm
(20 ft lbs +/- 1.0 ft lbs)
5
42
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter
Summary
The transmitter is designed to operate in a two-wire power/current loop
with loop resistance and power supply voltage within the operating
range shown in Figure 16.
Figure 16
Operating Range for ST 3000 Transmitters.
1440
1200
= Operating
Area
NOTE: A minimum of
250 0hms of loop
resistance is
Loop
Resistance
(ohms)
800
650
necessary to support
communications. Loop
resistance equals
barrier resistance plus
wire resistance plus
receiver resistance.
Also 45 volt operation
is permitted if not an
intrinsically safe
450
250
installation.
0
10.8 16.28 20.63 25 28.3
37.0
42.4
21012
Operating Voltage (Vdc)
Loop wiring is connected to the transmitter by simply attaching the
positive (+) and negative (–) loop wires to the positive (+) and negative
(–) SIGNAL screw terminals on the terminal block in the transmitter’s
electronics housing shown in Figure 17.
Each transmitter includes an internal ground terminal to connect the
transmitter to earth ground. A ground terminal can be optionally added
to the outside of the electronics housing. While it is not necessary to
ground the transmitter for proper operation, we suggest that you do so to
minimize the possible effects of “noise” on the output signal and
provide additional protection against lightning and static discharge
damage.
Note that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body
certification. Refer to section 3.2 CE Conformity (Europe) Notice for
special conditions.
Optional lightning protection (option LP) can be ordered for transmitters
that will be installed in areas highly susceptible to lightning strikes.
Figure 17 shows the 5-screw terminal block used when the lightning
protection option is ordered.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Summary, continued
Barriers can be installed per manufacturer’s instructions for transmitters
to be used in intrinsically safe applications.
Figure 17
ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Block
Electronics
Housing
Electronics
Housing
Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
+
+
-
-
L-
+
-
+
-
Internal
Internal
Ground
Terminal
Ground
Terminal
3-Screw Terminal Block
5-Screw Terminal Block
Lightning Protection Option (LP)
TPS reference
Transmitters that are to be digitally integrated to Honeywell’s TPS
system will be connected to the Smart Transmitter Interface Module in
the Process Manager, Advanced Process Manager or High Performance
Process Manager through a Field Termination Assembly. Details about
the TPS system connections are given in the PM/APM Smartline
Transmitter Integration Manual PM12-410 which is part of the TDC
3000X system bookset.
Allen-Bradley PLC
If you are digitally integrating the ST 3000 to an Allen Bradley PLC, the
same FTA and wiring procedures used with Honeywell’s TPS system
are also used with the Allen-Bradley 1771 and 1746 platforms.
For more information, contact:
ProSoft Technology, Inc.
(800) 326-7066 or
http://www.psft.com
Continued on next page
44
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Wiring connections
and installation
drawings
The procedure in Table 16 shows the steps for connecting power to the
transmitter. For loop wiring and external wiring diagrams, refer to the
installation drawings presented in Section 13. Detailed drawings are
provided for transmitter installation in non-intrinsically safe areas and
for intrinsically safe loops in hazardous area locations. If you are using
the transmitter with Honeywell’s TPS system, see the previous TPS
reference.
ATTENTION
• All wiring must comply with local codes, regulations, and
ordinances.
• If you will be using the transmitter in a hazardous area, be sure to
review the hazardous location reference data included in Appendix
D of this manual before operating the transmitter.
Table 16
Wiring the Transmitter
Step
1
Action
Loosen end-cap lock using a 1.5 mm allen wrench and remove end-
cap cover from terminal block end of electronics housing.
Feed loop power leads through one of conduit entrances on either
side of electronics housing. Plug whichever entrance you do not use.
2
ATTENTION
The transmitter accepts up to 16 AWG wire.
Observing polarity, connect positive loop power lead to SIGNAL +
terminal and negative loop power lead to SIGNAL – terminal.
3
Example – Connecting loop power to transmitter.
3-screw terminal block
5-screw terminal (option LP)
Loop
Loop
Power
+
-
Power
+
-
+
+
-
-
L
+
-
-
+
-
Replace end-cap, and tighten end-cap lock.
4
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Approval body
requirements
If your transmitter was ordered with Table III option 3N for self-
declared approval per 94/9/EC (ATEX4), you must use a power supply
that includes a voltage limiting device that will keep the voltage to the
transmitter from exceeding 42 Vdc. You can achieve this by using a
battery as the supply or one of these voltage limiting means.
• Double wound mains transformer per BS 3535 or equivalent.
• An adequately rated zener diode whose voltage is not significantly
higher than the rated voltage.
• An adequately rated semiconductor voltage regulator.
Lightning protection
When your transmitter is equipped with optional lightning protection,
you must connect a wire from the transmitter to ground as shown in
Figure 18 to make the protection effective. We recommend that you use
a size 8 AWG (American Wire Gage) or (8.37mm2) bare or green
covered wire.
Figure 18
Ground Connection for Lightning Protection.
Electronics
Housing
Connect to
Earth Ground
Continued on next page
46
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Process Sealing
The ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure
Transmitters are CSA certified as “Dual Seal” devices in accordance
with ANSI/ISA–12.27.01–2003, Requirements for Process Sealing
between Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process
Fluids.
Explosionproof
Conduit seal
Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group
A Hazardous (Classified) Location in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70,
the US National Electrical Code (NEC), require a “LISTED”
explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit, within 18 inches of
the transmitter. Crouse-Hinds® type EYS/EYD or EYSX/EYDX are
examples of “LISTED” explosionproof seals that meets this
requirement.
Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I, Division 1, Group
B, C or D Hazardous (Classified) Locations do not require an
explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit.
NOTE: Installation should conform to all national and local electrical
code requirements.
When installed as explosionproof in a Division 1 Hazardous Location,
keep covers tight while the transmitter is energized. Disconnect power
to the transmitter in the non-hazardous area prior to removing end caps
for service.
WARNING
When installed as nonincendive equipment in a Division 2 Hazardous
Location, disconnect power to the transmitter in the non-hazardous area,
or determine that the location is non-hazardous prior to disconnecting or
connecting the transmitter wires.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4
Wiring ST 3000 Transmitter, Continued
Existing meter
connections
Existing analog meters and SM 3000 Smart Meters can be connected to
Release 300 transmitters. Examples of each meter type are shown
below.
Analog Meter
Analog Meter Connections —You can connect the
analog meter (2-wires) integrally to Release 300
10
transmitter’s terminal block inside the electronics
housing. However, there are alternate wiring
%
methods for connecting an analog meter remotely
with the loop wiring. Section 13 in this manual
illustrates alternate wiring methods for connecting
an analog meter to Release 300 transmitters.
Smart Meter
SM 3000 Smart Meter Connections —The smart
meter (3-wires) can be connected remotely to a
Release 300 transmitter. Section 13 in this manual
illustrates alternate wiring methods for connecting
0
%
100
this smart meter to Release 300 transmitters.
New Smart Meter with Local Zero and Span New Smart Meter Connections – The new integral
smart meter (8-wires) is connected directly to the
transmitter’s PWA and is mounted to the
electronics module assembly inside the electronics
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
housing. The new integral smart meter is designed
for the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitter and
provides functionality not available with other
smart meter designs.
%
0
100
UNITS
SET
SPAN
ZERO
LOWER
VALUE
NOTE: Only one smart meter should be installed
integrally to the transmitter.
Be aware that the RMA 300 remote meter does not have custom and
flow units capability like the new smart meter. Therefore, if you use a
local smart meter that is configured to display readings in custom or
flow units in conjunction with an RMA 300 remote meter, the readings
of the two meters will be in different units.
ATTENTION
48
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5 —Getting Started
5.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics:
Section
Topic
See Page
5.1 Introduction ..................................................................................49
5.2 Establishing Communications ......................................................50
5.3 Making Initial Checks ...................................................................54
5.4 Changing Mode of Operation .......................................................57
About this section
If you have never used an SFC to “talk” to an ST 3000 transmitter, this
section tells you how to establish communications, make initial checks,
and change the transmitter’s mode of operation.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2
Establishing Communications
SFC connection rules
• Always plug the SFC leads into the jack on the SFC before you
connect them to the transmitter.
• Use this formula to find the maximum filter capacitance allowed
across the sense resistor (250 ohm minimum) for SFC
communications to work.
C (µF) = 1000 / Rsense
Connecting SFC
Using either leads with alligator clips or easy-hooks supplied with the
SFC, you connect the SFC directly to signal terminals on the
transmitter’s terminal block or at any convenient location in the 4 to 20
milliampere line. Observing polarity, connect the red lead to positive (+)
and the black lead to negative (–).
When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not
explosionproof.
WARNING
Figure 19 shows typical SFC connections across loop wiring to the
ST 3000 transmitter. (Non-lightning protection terminal connections
shown.)
Figure 19
Typical SFC Connections.
ST 3000
+
-
Power
Supply
+ Red
+
-
- Black
Receiver
Field
Terminals
250
Ω
SFC
STR3012
Continued on next page
50
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2
Establishing Communications, Continued
Starting
communications
Once you connect the SFC to the transmitter or loop wiring, you are
ready to start communicating with the transmitter. The procedure in
Table 17 outlines the steps for communications with an ST 3000
transmitter without an assigned tag number.
Table 17
Starting Communications with Transmitter.
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Slide power switch on left side of SFC to SFC runs its self check and displays
ON position.
initial prompt.
If this prompt appears, transmitter is
in Analog mode of operation. This is
the factory default mode of
2
P
U
T
L
O
O P
I
N
M A N
operation setting. Put your control
loop in the manual mode of
operation before initiating SFC
communications. Note that you must
do this separately through the
receiving device in the loop.
OR
If this prompt appears, transmitter is
in Digital (DE) mode of operation.
D
E
–
X
M T
R
S
P
C
R
U
E
R
S S
I
D
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off. Go to Step 4.
3
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
E
E D ?
?
ID
OR
Go to Step 5
This prompt does not appear for
transmitters operating in DE mode.
See DE transmitter display response
in Step 5.
NON-VOL
Confirms that “TRIPS” are secured. Go
to Step 5 for display response.
Required for transmitters operating
in analog mode only.
4
ENTER
(Yes)
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2
Establishing Communications, Continued
Starting
communications,
continued
Table 17
Starting Communications with Transmitter, continued
Step
5
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Message exchange is taking place
Note that communications with
transmitter are blocked until [ID] key
is pressed.
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
K
I
N
A
G .
.
.
L
I
N
D
P
T
G
N O .
Transmitter is in analog
_
transmission mode. “LIN” means
transmitter is set for linear output
instead of square root (SQRT). “DP”
means transmitter is differential
pressure type instead of gauge
pressure (GP) or absolute pressure
(AP). Last eight columns in bottom
row are blank when no tag number
has been assigned to this
OR
transmitter. Go to Step 8.
D
E
–
X
M T
R
T
A
G
N O .
_
Transmitter is in digital (DE)
transmission mode. Last eight
columns in bottom row are blank
when no tag number has been
assigned to this transmitter. Go to
Step 7.
OR
T
A
G
N
O .
N
O
X
M T
R
R
E
S
P O N S E
Communication error messages are
cycled at two second intervals and
display returns to initial prompt. Go
to Step 6.
6
There is a communication problem,
check the
• power and SFC connections - Is the
polarity correct; red to positive and
black to negative?
Correct any wiring, resistance, or
power supply problems, and try
communicating again - Press [ID]
key.
If you are still not getting the
correct display, note error
messages and refer to
• loop resistance - Is there a minimum
of 250 ohms resistance between the
SFC and the power supply?
Troubleshooting section in this
manual for probable cause.
• power supply - Is power applied, is
there greater than 11 volts at the
transmitter, and are you within the
operating area on the curve in Figure
16?
Continued on next page
52
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2
Establishing Communications, Continued
Starting
communications,
continued
Table 17
Starting Communications with Transmitter, continued
Step
7
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Initiates shift key selection.
D
E
–
X
M T
R
H
T
A
G
–
N O .
^
SHIFT
S
I
F T
DE READ
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
Begins upload of configuration
database from transmitter.
A
W O R
K
I
N
A
G –
G
.
3
3 %
ID
Operation completion rate is shown
in percent. Note that display for ID
response reverts to style used for
transmitter in analog mode when
upload is completed.
L
I
N
D
P
T
N O .
_
F/S DIR
U
STAT
8
Initiates status check.
S
S
T
A
T U S
F C
W O R
K
C
I
N G .
.
.
If messages other than this one are
cycled in display, refer to the
Troubleshooting section in this
manual for an explanation of the
message, the probable cause, and
any corrective action.
S
S
T
T
A
T U
S
A
T
U S
H
E C K = O K
L
I
N
E
D
P
Signals end of status messages for
display.
R
A D Y .
.
.
ATTENTION
When assigned,
the transmitter’s tag number also
appears in the top row of the
display.
9
You have established
communications with transmitter and
are ready to initiate other SFC
operations.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3
Making Initial Checks
Checking mode and
software
Before doing anything else, it is a good idea to confirm the transmitter’s
mode of operation and identify the version of software being used in the
SFC and the transmitter. Table 18 outlines the steps for quickly
checking the transmitter’s mode of operation and software versions of
the SFC and the transmitter.
Table 18
Confirming Mode of Operation and Identifying Software Versions.
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Initiates shift key selection. Note that
transmitter tag number ST 3000 in
top row is used for example
purposes only.
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
S
F
T
T
3
Ø Ø Ø
^
SHIFT
I
–
A <–>DE
Q
A
/
D
E
S
D
T
E
3
Ø Ø Ø
Asks if you want to change to DE
(digital) mode. This means
transmitter is in analog mode of
operation.
C
H N
G
T
O
?
OR
Asks if you want to change to
analog mode. This means
transmitter is in DE (digital) mode of
operation.
A
C
/
D
E
S
T
3
Ø Ø Ø
H N
G
T
O
A
N
A L O G
?
Exits analog to DE change function.
2
3
L
I
N
E
D
P
S
.
T
3
3
Ø Ø Ø
Ø Ø Ø
Ø Ø Ø
CLR
(No)
R
A D Y .
.
Initiates shift key selection.
L
I
N
D
S
P
S
F
T
T
^
SHIFT
H
I
–
SW VER
X
.
S
S
/
W
C
N
4
O
.
S
X
T
3
Both SFC and XMTR software
versions appear in display. Note that
only SFC version appears when
SFC is not connected to transmitter
or [SHIFT] and [ID] keys have not yet
been pressed for transmitter in DE
mode.
=
=
F
5
M T
R
3
.
Ø
3
Exit function. SFC is “READY” for
next operation.
4
L
I
N
E
D
P
S
.
T
3 Ø Ø Ø
CLR
(NO)
R
A D Y .
.
Analog and DE
modes
In the analog transmission mode, the transmitter sends a proportional 4
to 20 milliampere output signal that can be used as a compatible analog
input signal to a controller or a recorder in the control room
Continued on next page
54
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3
Making Initial Checks, Continued
Analog and DE
modes, continued
A transmitter in the digital (DE) mode can communicate in a direct
digital fashion with Honeywell’s TPS system and Allen-Bradley PLCs.
The digital signal can include process variable as well as configuration
database data depending upon the broadcast format selected during
configuration.
Software version
compatibility
The SFC model STS103 with software version 5.0 or greater is fully
compatible with all Series 100 and Series 900 Release 300 transmitters.
The SFC will operate with transmitters that have older software
versions, but functions will be limited to those applicable for the
transmitter software.
Write protect option
The ST 3000 transmitters are available with what is called a “write
protect option”. It consists of a jumper located on the transmitter’s PWA
that you can position to allow read and write access or read only access
to the transmitter’s configuration database. When the write protect
option is ordered, transmitters are shipped with a default jumper position
for read-only. This means that the transmitter’s configuration database
can not be overwritten. To allow read/write access, the jumper can be
moved to the read/write position. When the write protect option is not
ordered access is read/write.
Figure 20 shows the location of the write protect jumper on the PWA for
Release 300 transmitters.
Figure 20
Write Protect Jumper Location and Selections.
Read and
Write
W
R
Read Only
Power
Connector
Meter
Connector
Failsafe
Direction
Jumper
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3
Making Initial Checks, Continued
Local smart meter
display indications
You can check the status of all the indicators on the Local Smart Meter
LCD display by cycling power to the transmitter. The meter runs a brief
self-test whenever power is applied to the transmitter. All the display
indicators are lit during the self-test as shown in Figure 21.
Figure 21
Display With All Indicators Lit.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
%
100
SPAN
UNITS
SE T
%
-
18.
8
.80
FLOW
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
ANALOG
In H
O
ZERO
2
LOWER
VALUE
mmHg
K GPH
GPM PSI
A
KNOWN VALUE
Please refer to Table 31 in this manual for a description of the pushbuttons
on the meter face. See Section 8.6 for a description of the indicators with
examples of typical display indications and error codes. (Note that the
display may revert to dashes (– – –) after the self-test until the transmitter
initializes all its functions.) Use the SFC to check the transmitter’s status.
56
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4
Changing Mode of Operation
Procedure
If you need to change your transmitter’s mode of operation, use the
steps in Table 19 to change the mode from analog to digital or digital to
analog. If you have an optional Local Smart Meter, you can readily tell
your transmitter’s present mode of operation by checking whether the
ANALOG indicator on the meter display is lit or not.
Attention: Only transmitters with Option DE can be set to DE Mode.
Table 19
Changing Mode of Operation.
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Initiates shift key selection. Note that
transmitter tag number ST 3000 in
top row is used for example
purposes only.
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
S
F
T
T
3
Ø Ø Ø
^
SHIFT
I
–
A <–>DE
Q
A
/
D
E
S
D
T
E
3
Ø Ø Ø
Asks if you want to change to DE
(digital) mode. If you want to change
mode, go to Step 2. If you do not
want to change mode, press [CLR]
key to exit function.
C
H N
G
T
T
O
?
OR
A
C
/
D
E
S
T
3
Ø Ø Ø
Asks if you want to change to
analog mode. If you want to change
mode, go to Step 2. If you do not
want to change mode, press [CLR]
key to exit function.
H N
G
O
A
N
A L O G
?
NON-VOL
Prompt asks for confirmation of
mode change.
2
3
A
A
/
D
E
E
S
S
T
3
Ø Ø Ø
R
Y
O U
U
R E
?
ENTER
(Yes)
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
A
S
/
D
C
E
E
S
I
T
3
Ø Ø Ø
F
W O R
K
E
N
G
.
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
Mode of operation is now DE
(digital).
A
/
D
S
T
X
3
Ø Ø Ø
R
D
M T
OR
A
/
D
E
S
T
T
3
Ø Ø Ø
Mode of operation is now analog.
Ready for next function.
A N
A
D
L
O G
X M T R
L
I
N
E
P
S
3
Ø Ø Ø
R
A D Y .
.
.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4
Changing Mode of Operation, Continued
Keystroke summary
Figure 22 shows keystroke summary for changing mode of
operation for quick reference.
Figure 22
Keystroke Summary for Changing Mode of Operation.
A <–>DE
Q
^
SHIFT
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
58
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 —Configuration
6.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics:
Section
Topic
See Page
6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................59
6.2 Overview ......................................................................................60
6.3 Entering a Tag Number................................................................71
6.4 Selecting Output Form .................................................................73
6.5 Adjusting Damping Time ..............................................................76
6.6 Selecting Unit of Measurement ....................................................78
6.7 Setting Range Values Using SFC ................................................80
6.8 Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments..........................84
6.9 Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only)...........................91
6.10 Selecting Message Format (DE Mode Only).................................94
6.11 Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC............................................96
6.12 Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons.............................103
6.13 Disconnecting SFC ....................................................................122
About this section
This section introduces you to ST 3000 transmitter configuration. It
identifies the parameters that make up the transmitter’s configuration
database and provides procedures for entering values/selections for the
given configuration parameters.
If you will be using the SCT 3000 software Release 3.12.2 or greater
instead of an SFC to configure the transmitter, follow the SCT 3000 on-
line help and on-line documentation to configure the transmitter’s
database.
ATTENTION
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview
About configuration
Each ST 3000 Transmitter includes a configuration database which
defines its particular operating characteristics. You can use an SFC to
change selected parameters within a given transmitter’s database to alter
its operating characteristics. We call this process of viewing and/or
changing database parameters “configuration”.
Figure 23 shows a graphic summation of the configuration process.
Figure 23
Summary of Configuration Process
Configuration Database
Transmitter's
Operating
Characteristics
View and/or
change
database
parameters
SFC
ST 3000
If the transmitter is operating in the DE mode, you can also configure
the transmitter’s configuration database through displays at the
Universal Station or GUS. See the PM/APM Smartline Integration
Manual PM12-410 for details.
ATTENTION
Continued on next page
60
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
SFC and ST 3000
transmitter memories
Both the SFC and the ST 3000 transmitter have working memories as
shown in Figure 24. They serve as temporary storage areas for data
exchanged between the SFC and the transmitter during communications.
The transmitter also has a non-volatile memory as the permanent storage
area for a backup copy of all the data held in the working memory. This
memory retains its data even if the transmitter loses power.
The SFC has a second temporary storage area called the hold memory.
This memory supports the SFC’s save and restore functions. It serves as
the temporary storage area for a configuration database saved from a
transmitter until it can be restored in a transmitter. Data in this memory
can not be displayed or altered, and it will be lost if the SFC is turned off.
Figure 24 shows the working relationship between SFC and transmitter
memories during communications.
Figure 24
SFC and ST 3000 Transmitter Memories.
Working
Memory
Working
Memory
Hold
Memory
Non/Volatile
Memory
SFC
ST 3000
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
Copying data into
non-volatile memory
When setting-up or configuring a ST 3000, whether you are changing one
element or a full database, all configuration data must be copied into the
transmitter’s non-volatile memory.
Normally, thirty seconds after a value is changed the transmitter
automatically copies it into the non-volatile memory. But, if you change
an element and power goes down before the change is copied to non-
volatile memory, you will lose the data in the working memory.
ATTENTION
Therefore, whenever you make any changes in the transmitter using the
SFC, always end your procedure by pressing SHIFT and ENTER. This
action immediately copies the changes from working memory to non-
volatile memory.
Continued on next page
62
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
What to configure
Table 20 summarizes the parameters that are included in the
configuration database for an ST 3000 pressure transmitter in either the
analog or DE mode of operation.
Be aware that configuration data for the transmitter as well as for the
Local Smart Meter is stored in a non-volatile memory on the
transmitter’s PWA and make up the transmitter’s configuration
database. Therefore, the transmitter and meter configuration are lost if
the PWA is replaced. Performing a save and restore function using the
SFC will preserve the transmitter’s configuration database. See Section
8.5 for the steps to perform save and restore functions using the SFC.
Since the SFC is compatible with other Honeywell Smartline
transmitters, be sure all configuration data applies to a pressure
transmitter.
ATTENTION
Table 20
Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters
Configuration Data
Transmitter Tag Number
Setting or Selection
Up to eight characters
Any one of these value selections in seconds:
Damping Time Constant
0.00
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
8.0
16.0
32.0
LIN (Linear)
SQRT (Square Root)
Type of Output Conformity
Unit of Measurement
ATTENTION
Note that ST 3000 transmitters with inches of water
ranges are factory calibrated using pressure referenced to a temperature
of 39.2°F (4°C).
Pressure readings can be displayed in any one of these pre-programmed
engineering units:
“H2O_39F
mmHg_0C
“H2O_68F
PSI
MPa
bar
KG/cm^2
mmH2O_4C
KPa
mbar
G/cm^2 inHg_32F mH2O_4C
ATM “H2O_60F
LRV (Lower Range Value)
(Process input for 4 mAdc
(0%) output)
Key in desired value through SFC keyboard or set LRV to applied
pressure.
URV (Upper Range Value)
(Process input for 20 mAdc
(100%) output)
Key in desired value through SFC keyboard or set URV to applied
pressure.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
What to configure,
continued
Table 20
Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters, continued
Configuration Data
Setting or Selection
The following parameters are for transmitters in DE mode of operation only.
Any one of these selections based on control system information needs:
Mode of Output Signal
Indication
Single Range
Sends the PV value corresponding to the
transmitter’s working range (PVw) to the
control system for display. For systems using
STDC card or STIMV IOP module (also called
STIM Smart Transmitter Interface Module).
Dual Range (STDC)
Single Rng W/SV
Sends the PV values corresponding to the
transmitter’s full range (PVt) and working range
(PVw) measurements to the control system
for display. For systems using STDC card only.
Sends PV value corresponding to the
transmitter’s working range (PVw) and
temperature value from the transmitter’s sensor
to the control system for display. For systems
using STDC card or STIMV IOP module.
Choose one of these broadcast types for data transmission to the digital
control system: Note that “DB” in following selection prompt stands for
“database”.
Message Format
w/oDB (4 Byte) Byte 1 is output signal mode
Bytes 2 to 4 are PV value
1
2
3
4
FLAG
PV
PV
PV
w/DB (6 Byte)
Byte 1 is output signal mode
Bytes 2 to 4 are PV value
Byte 5 is data type identifier (LRV, URV span, etc.)
Byte 6 is data being sent
1
2
3
4
5
6
FLAG
PV
PV
PV
ID
DB
ATTENTION
The approximate rates of transmission in repeats per
second are:
Data
4 - Byte
6 - Byte
PV value
Temperature
3 rpts/sec
1 rpt/2.5 sec
2.5 rpts/sec
1 rpt/3 sec
Continued on next page
64
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
What to configure,
continued
Table 20
Summary of Pressure Transmitter Configuration Parameters, continued
Configuration Data
Failsafe Mode
Setting or Selection
NOTE: This parameter is valid only to select the failsafe action for the
STDC card in a controller - not the transmitter. If you are using
the STDC card to interface with the ST 3000 transmitter, contact
Honeywell Technical Assistance in using this parameter.
ATTENTION
An STIMV IOP module has built-in failsafe capabilities
and ignores this parameter.
The following parameters are only for transmitters with optional Local Smart Meter.
If the transmitter is set for LINEAR output conformity, you can choose to
Meter Engineering Units
have the Local Smart Meter display pressure readings in one of these
engineering units:
“H2O_39F
mmHg_0C
PSI
MPa
BAR
Kg/cm^2
inHg_32F
KPa
mBAR
g/cm^2 mmH2O_4C mH2O_4C
Custom
%
If the transmitter is set for SQUARE ROOT output conformity, you can
choose to have the Local Smart Meter display flow readings in one of
these engineering units:
GPM
GPH
Custom
%
Engineering Units High and
Low
You can enter desired lower and upper (high) display limits to scale flow
(GPM, GPH) or Custom engineering units to represent the transmitter’s
0 to 100% output within the meter’s display range of ±19,990,000.
ATTENTION
When the transmitter is set to SQUARE ROOT output
conformity, the lower display limit for flow units (GPM, GPH) and Custom
unit must equal zero (0).
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
Configuration
decision summary
The flowchart in Figure 25 summarizes the typical entries/selections
decisions associated with configuring an ST 3000 pressure transmitter.
Figure 25
Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration.
Start
Have you
assigned a unique
"tag number" for
the transmitter?
NO
Assign a unique tag number consisting of up to 8
alphanumeric characters to identify this transmitter.
YES
See procedure in Table 21 for entry details.
Establish communications and
enter assigned Tag Number at
SFC configuration prompt TAG
NO.
Press [ID] key and acknowledge TRIPS SECUREDprompt, if
required, to call up SFC prompt TAG NO. Use [NUM/ALPHA]
key to toggle between Alpha mode and Numeric mode to
enter alphabetic characters and numbers, respectively,
through SFC keys.
Do you know if
output is to represent
linear or square root
calculation?
NO
Determine if transmitter's output is to represent a
straight linear calculation or a square root calculation
for flow measurements.
YES
See procedure in Table 22 for selection details.
Call up SFC configuration prompt CONFORMITYand select
menu item LINEARor SQUAREROOT.
Select LINEARor SQUAREROOT
through SFC configuration
prompt CONFORMITY.
A
Continued on next page
66
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
Configuration
decision summary,
continued
Figure 25
Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration, continued.
A
Do you know how
much damping time
is needed?
NO
Determine appropriate damping time value for your
process. We suggest that you set the damping to the
largest value that is reasonable for your process.
YES
See procedure in Table 23 for selection details.
Select desired damping time
value in seconds through the
SFC prompt DAMP.
Press [DAMP] key and use [NEXT] or [PREV] key to select
stored damping time value through SFC prompt DAMP 1.
Do you know what
engineering units to
use for pressure
readings?
NO
See Unit of Measurement in Table 24 for list of available
pre-programmed engineering units in the SFC.
YES
See procedure in Table 24 for selection details.
Select desired pre-programmed
engineering units through SFC
prompt UNITS.
Call up a pressure value on the SFC display and repeatedly
press [UNITS] key to select desired pre-programmed
engineering units through the SFC prompt UNITS 1.
B
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
Configuration
decision summary,
continued
Figure 25
Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration, continued.
B
NO
Do you know what
range values to use
?
Determine Lower Range Value (LRV) and Upper Range
Value (URV) to be used for setting range values.
YES
See procedure in Table 25 or 26 for range setting details.
Use [LRV] and [URV] keys to call up respective SFC prompts
for keying in range values or setting range values to applied
pressures.
Set LRV and URV to desired
values through SFC prompts
LRV 1and URV 1.
NO
Will transmitter be
operating in DE
mode?
YES
See procedures in Tables 28 and 29 for DE
parameter selections.
Select appropriate DE
configuration parameters
through SFC prompt DE CONF.
Press [SHIFT] and [MENU ITEM] keys to call up
DE configuration menu.
C
continued on next page
68
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
Configuration
decision summary,
continued
Figure 25
Flowchart — ST 3000 Pressure Transmitter Configuration, Continued.
C
Does transmitter
have Local Smart
Meter option?
NO
YES
Use buttons on face of Local
Smart Meter or SFC to select
engineering units and range
values as applicable.
See procedures in Tables 33 to 36 for configuring Local
Smart Meter for operation.
End
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.2
Overview, Continued
SFC interface
characteristics
Keep these three basic interface characteristics in mind when you use
the SFC to configure a transmitter.
• If the displayed prompt contains a cursor, you can key in a number or
an alphabetic character in that space. However, to key in an alphabetic
character, you must first press the [NUM/ALPHA] key to initiate the
alphabet selection or alpha mode.
• Example:
L
I
N
D
P
T
A
G
N O .
_
Cursor
NUM/
ALPHA
L
I
N
D
P
T
A
G
N O .
_
*
Alpha Mode
• If the displayed prompt includes an equal sign (=), you can make
another selection after the equal sign by pressing the [MENU ITEM] key to
call up the next selection Note that you can use the [s NEXT ] key to call
up the next parameter or the [t PREV] key to return to the previous
parameter.
• Example:
D
F
E
C
O
=
N
F
B
S
T
3
o
Ø Ø Ø
S
/
O
L
/
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
D
F
E
/
C
O
=
N
F
B
S
T
3
i
Ø Ø Ø
S
/
O
H
• If the displayed prompt contains a question mark (?), you can initiate
the action in question by pressing the [ENTER] key to answer yes or
abort it by pressing the [CLR] key to answer no.
• Example:
L
R
V
1
P
L
T
3
?
Ø 1
1
S E
T
R
V
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
To initiate setting of LRV to applied pressure, press
To abort setting of LRV to applied pressure, press
CLR
(NO)
70
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3
Entering a Tag Number
There is a Configuration Record Sheet provided in Appendix C, if you
ATTENTION
want to record the configuration data for your transmitter.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 21 shows how to enter a sample tag number of
PT 3011 into the transmitter’s configuration database.
Table 21
Entering Tag Number
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off. This prompt only appears for
transmitters in analog mode
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
K
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish transmitter
communications
2
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
I
N
A
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
N O .
ATTENTION
This procedure
_
also applies for transmitters in DE
mode. The prompt may show DE -
XMTR instead of output form and
transmitter type in top row, if you
have not established
communications as previously
described in Section 5.2 of this
manual.
Put SFC keyboard into alpha mode.
Activates alphabetic characters in
upper right hand corner of keys.
2
3
L
I
N
D
P
T
A
A
G
N O .
NUM/
_
*
ALPHA
Key in P, T, and space as first
characters in tag number.
P
9
L
L
L
I
I
I
N
N
N
D
D
D
P
P
P
T
P
G
G
N O .
N O .
N O .
_
*
T
6
T
P
A
T
_
*
SCR PAD
T
P
A
T
G
_
*
Take SFC keyboard out of alpha
mode and put it into numeric mode.
4
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
G
N O .
NUM/
_
ALPHA
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.3
Entering a Tag Number, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 21
Entering Tag Number, continued
Step
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
SW VER
Key in “3011” as numbers in Tag
number.
5
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
G
N O .
X
3
_
3
Z
0
L
L
L
I
I
I
N
N
N
D
D
D
P
P
P
T
P
A
T
G
G
G
N O .
_
3
3
3
Ø
T
P
A
T
N O .
V
1
_
Ø 1
T
P
A
T
N O .
V
1
_
Ø 1
1
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
Loads tag number into transmitter’s
working memory.
6
L
I
N
D
P
T
I
A
N
G
N O .
S
F C
W O R
K
G .
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
G
N O .
Ø 1
3
1
Keystroke summary
Figure 26 shows keystroke summary for entering tag number for quick
reference.
Figure 26
Keystroke Summary for Entering Tag Number
DE READ
A
ID
NON-VOL
( analog mode only)
ENTER
(Yes)
Alpha
NUM/
NUM/
Number
ALPHA
ALPHA
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
22506
72
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4
Selecting Output Form
Background
You can select the transmitter’s output to represent a straight linear
calculation or a square root calculation for flow measurement
applications using a differential pressure type transmitter. Thus, we refer
to the linear or the square root selection as the output conformity or the
output form.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 22 shows how to select the desired output
conformity.
If the transmitter is equipped with a local smart meter, you must
reconfigure the smart meter as described in Section 6.11 or 6.12 of this
manual whenever you change the transmitter’s output conformity.
ATTENTION
Table 22
Selecting Output Conformity
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Prompt asks if you want to access
configuration parameter called
conformity. if you want to access it,
go to Step 2. If you do not want to
access it, press [CLR] key to exit
function or [s NEXT] key to call up
next configuration parameter.
B
S T
C
O N
F
I
G
CONF
C
C
O N F O
R
M
I
T
Y ?
NON-VOL
Present output conformity is linear.
2
3
4
O N F O
R
L
M
I
I
T
Y
N
E A
R
ENTER
(Yes)
OR
Present output conformity is square
root.
C
C
O N F O
R
M
I
T
Y
R
S
Q U A R
E
O O T
O O T
DE CONF
Change output conformity to square
root.
O N F O
R
M
I
T
Y
R
I
MENU
S
Q U A R
E
ITEM
OR
Change output conformity to linear.
C
C
O N F O
R
L
M
I
T
Y
I
N
E A
R
NON-VOL
Conformity change is entered in
SFC.
O N F O
R
M
I
T
T
Y
I
E
N
T
E
R E
D
N
H
S F C
ENTER
(Yes)
C
D
O N F O
R
M
I
Y
C
Prompt asks if you want to
O W N L O A
D
A N G E ?
download change to transmitter. If
you want to download change, go to
Step 5. If you do not want to
download change, press [CLR] key to
return to initial prompt in Step 1.
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
5
C
S
O N F O
R
M
I
T
I
Y
N
F
C
W O R
K
G .
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
S T
O N F O
C
O N
F
I
G
Output conformity is changed in
transmitter. Press [s NEXT] key to
call up next parameter or [CLR] key
to exit function.
C
R
M
I
T
Y ?
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4
Selecting Output Form, Continued
Keystroke summary
Figure 27 shows keystroke summary for selecting output conformity for
quick reference.
Figure 27
Keystroke Summary for Selecting Output Conformity.
B
CONF
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
22507
About square root
output
For differential pressure transmitters measuring the pressure drop across
a primary element, the flow rate is directly proportional to the square
root of the differential or pressure drop. The ST 3000 transmitter’s
output is automatically converted to equal percent of flow when its
output conformity is configured as square root.
You can use these formulas to manually calculate the percent of flow for
comparison purposes.
ΔP
• 100 = % P
Span
Where,
ΔP
= Differential pressure input in engineering units
Span = Transmitter’s measurement span (URV – LRV)
% P = Pressure input in percent of span
%P
Therefore,
• 100 = % Flow
100
And, you can use the following formula to determine the corresponding
current output in milliamperes direct current.
(% Flow • 16) + 4 = mA dc Output
Continued on next page
74
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.4
Selecting Output Form, Continued
About square root
output, continued
Example: If you have a differential pressure transmitter with a range of
0 to 100 inches of water with an input of 49 inches of water,
substituting into the above formulas yields:
49
• 100 = 49%
100
49%
• 100 = 70% Flow, and
100
70% • 16 + 4 = 15.2 mA dc Output
Square root dropout
To avoid unstable output at readings near zero, the ST 3000 transmitter
automatically drops square root conformity and changes to linear
conformity for low differential pressure readings. As shown in Figure
28, the dropout point is between 0.4 and 0.5 % of differential pressure
input depending on direction.
Figure 28
Square Root Dropout Points.
Flow
(% of Span)
15
0utput
(mA dc)
6.4
14
13
12
11
10
Dropout Points
5.6
9
8
7
6
5
4
4.8
3
2
1
0
4
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1
1.2
1.4
Differential Pressure (% Full Scale)
22508
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5
Adjusting Damping Time
Background
You can adjust the damping time to reduce the output noise. We suggest
that you set the damping to the smallest value that is reasonable for your
process.
The electrical noise effect on the output signal is partially related to the
turndown ratio of the transmitter. As the turndown ratio increases, the
peak-to-peak noise on the output signal increases. You can use this
formula to find the turndown ratio using the range information for your
transmitter.
ATTENTION
Upper Range Limit
(Upper Range Value – Lower Range Value)
Turndown Ratio =
Example: The turndown ratio for a 400 inH O transmitter with a range of
2
0 to 50 inH O would be:
2
400
(50 – 0)
8
1
Turndown Ratio =
=
or 8:1
Procedure
The procedure in Table 23 outlines the keystrokes used to adjust the
damping time to two seconds as an example.
Table 23
Adjusting Damping Time
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Present damping time in seconds
C
D
A
M
P
1
P
S
T
E
3
0
1
1
DAMP
Ø .
3
C
O N D
S
Message exchange is working.
H
2
D
S
A
F
M
C
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
.
1
.
1
NEXT
W O R
K
N
G .
Next highest damping time value in
seconds.
D
A
M
P
1
P
S
T
E
3
0
1
1
Ø .
5
C
O N D
S
ATTENTION
The [s NEXT] key
raises the setting while the
[t PREV] key lowers the setting. Or,
you can key in a number that will be
converted to closest damping value
listed in Table 20.
Transmitter’s damping time is now
set to two seconds.
Repeat Step 2 until display shows
3
D
A
M
P
2
1
P
S
T
E
3
0
1
1
ATTENTION
.
Ø
C
O N D
S
You do not need to
press the [ENTER] key to store the
damping time in the transmitter’s
memory.
Continued on next page
76
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.5
Adjusting Damping Time, Continued
Keystroke summary
Figure 29 shows keystroke summary for adjusting damping time for
quick reference.
Figure 29
Keystroke Summary for Adjusting Damping Time
C
DAMP
H
L
Number
22509
NEXT
PREV
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.6
Selecting Unit of Measurement
Background
You can choose to have the pressure measurements displayed in one of
the preprogrammed engineering units in the SFC.
Procedure
Table 24 lists the pre-programmed units and shows how to select them.
The engineering units shown in Table 23 are only available in an SFC
with software version 3.2 or greater. The selections are similar in other
software versions but without temperature references and minus the
inches of water at 68°F (20°C) engineering units.
ATTENTION
Table 24
Pre-Programmed Engineering Units for Selection
D
THEN sequentially press
key until
UNITS
IF you want URV, LRV, etc.
displayed in …
display shows…
inches of water at 39.2°F (4°C)
U
U
N
N
I
I
T S
T S
1
1
P
T
3
0
_
1
3
1
H
2
2
O
9 F
"
inches of water at 68°F (20°C)
P
T
3
0
_
1
6
1
H
O
8 F
"
millimeters of mercury at 0°C
(32°F)
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T S
T S
T S
T S
T S
T S
T S
T S
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
P
T
3
g
0
1
1
_
m m H
Ø C
pounds per square inch
kilopascals
P
P
T
S
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
a
P
K
T
P
megapascals
P
T
P
M
a
millibar
P
T
B
3
m
A
R
R
bar
P
B
T
A
3
3
grams per square centimeter
kilograms per square centimeter
P
g
T
/
c m ^ 2
P
T
3
0
1
K G
/
c m ^ 2
Continued on next page
78
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.6
Selecting Unit of Measurement, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 24
Pre-Programmed Engineering Units for Selection, continued
D
THEN sequentially press
display shows…
key until
UNITS
IF you want URV, LRV, etc.
displayed in …
inches of mercury at 32°F (0°C)
U
U
U
N
N
N
I
I
I
T S
T S
T S
1
1
1
P
i
T
n
3
g
0
_
1
3
1
H
2 F
millimeters of water at 4°C
(39.2°F)
P
T
3
2
0
1
1
_
m m H
O
4
C
meters of water at 4°C (39.2°F)
P
T
3
0
1
1
_
m H
2
O
4
C
U
U
N
N
I
T
S
S
1
P
T
T
3
1
normal atmoshperes
0
1
M
2
A
I
T
1
P
"
T
3
1
inches of water at 60°F (15.6°C)
0
_
1
6
H
O
0 F
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.7
Setting Range Values Using SFC
Background
You can set the LRV and URV by either keying in the desired values
through the SFC keyboard or applying the corresponding LRV and
URV pressures directly to the transmitter.
ATTENTION
• We factory calibrate ST 3000 Smart Transmitters with inches of
water ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a
temperature of 39.2°F (4°C).
• For a reverse range, enter the upper range value as the LRV and the
lower range value as the URV. For example, to make a 0 to 50 psi
range a reverse range, enter 50 as the LRV and 0 as the URV.
• The URV changes automatically to compensate for any changes in
the LRV and maintain the present span (URV – LRV).
• If you must change both the LRV and URV, always change the LRV
first.
Procedure 1
Table 25 gives the procedure for the range values for a sample 5 to 45
inH2O at 39.2°F (4°C) range.
Table 25
Keying in LRV and URV
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
E
Present LRV setting. (Pressure for 4
mAdc (0%) output.)
L
L
R
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
LRV
0%
_
3
Ø . Ø Ø Ø Ø
H
2
2
O
9 F
"
Key in desired LRV setting. (It is not
necessary to key in a decimal point
and zeros for a whole number.)
2
3
S
R
5
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
5
_
_
3
H
O
9 F
"
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
L
R
V
1
P
I
T
3
.
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
New LRV setting stored in
transmitter’s working memory.
L
R
5
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
_
3
.
Ø Ø Ø Ø
H
2
2
O
9 F
"
F
Present URV setting. (Pressure for
20 mAdc (100%) output.)
4
U
R
1
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
URV
100%
_
3
Ø 5
.
Ø Ø
H
O
9 F
"
Continued on next page
80
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.7
Setting Range Values Using SFC, Continued
Procedure 1,
continued
Table 25
Keying in LRV and URV, continued
Step
5
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Key in 45 as desired URV setting.
U
U
R
4
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
R
S
_
_
4
H
2
2
O
3
9 F
"
R
4
V
5
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
5
_
_
H
O
3
9 F
"
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
6
U
S
R
V
1
P
I
T
3
.
Ø 1
1
F C
W O R
K
N
G
2
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
U
R
4
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
New URV setting stored in
transmitter’s working memory.
_
5
.
Ø Ø Ø
H
O
3
9 F
"
Keystroke 1 summary
Figure 30 shows keystroke summary for keying in LRV and URV for
quick reference.
Figure 30
Keystroke Summary for Keying in LRV and URV.
E
LRV
0%
Number
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
F
URV
100%
Number
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
22510
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.7
Setting Range Values Using SFC, Continued
Procedure 2
Table 26 gives the procedure for setting range values to sample applied
pressures.
Table 26
Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Apply known input pressure to
transmitter that represents LRV for 0%
(4 mAdc) output.
E
LRV
0%
Present LRV setting. (Pressure for 4
mAdc (0%) output.)
2
3
L
R
5
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
_
3
.
Ø Ø Ø Ø
H
2
O
9 F
"
G
Prompt asks if you want to set LRV
to applied pressure. If you don’t
want to set LRV, press [CLR] key to
exit function. Otherwise, go to Step
4.
L
R
R
V
1
P
L
T
3
?
Ø 1
1
SET
S
E T
R
V
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
4
5
L
V
1
P
I
T
3
.
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
1
K
N
G
2
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
R
7
V
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Applied LRV setting stored in
transmitter's working memory.
_
.
8
3
7
7
H
O
3
9 F
"
Apply known input pressure to
transmitter that represents URV for
100% (20 mAdc) output.
F
Present URV setting. (Pressure for
20 mAdc (100%) output.)
6
7
U
U
R
4
V
1
8
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
URV
100%
_
3
7
.
3
7
H
2
O
9 F
"
G
Prompt asks if you want to set URV
to applied pressure. If you don’t
want to set URV, press [CLR] key to
exit function. Otherwise, go to Step
8.
R
V
1
P
T
3
?
Ø 1
1
SET
S
E T
U R
V
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
8
U
S
R
V
1
P
I
T
3
.
Ø 1
1
1
F C
W O R
K
N
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
Applied URV setting stored in
transmitter’s working memory.
U
R
5
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
5
.
4
8
2
Continued on next page
82
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.7
Setting Range Values Using SFC, Continued
Procedure 2,
continued
Table 26
Setting LRV and URV to Applied Pressures, continued
Step
9
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Initiates shift key selection.
U
R
V
1
P
F
T
T
3 Ø
1
1
^
SHIFT
S
H
I
–
.
.
.
NON-VOL
Saves data in transmitter’s non-
volatile memory. This takes
approximately 8 seconds.
U
S
R
V
1
P
I
T
3
.
Ø 1
1
ENTER
(Yes)
F C
W O R
K
N
G
.
.
U
D
R
A
V
1
P
V
T
3
Ø 1
1
T
A
N
D
O N
P
O L A T
I
L E
L
I
N
E
P
.
T
3
Ø 1
1
R
A D Y .
.
Keystroke 2 summary
Figure 31 shows keystroke summary for setting LRV and URV to
applied pressures for quick reference.
Figure 31
Keystroke Summary for Setting LRV and URV to Applied
Pressures.
E
LRV
0%
G
SET
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
F
URV
100%
G
SET
NON-VOL
NON-VOL
^
ENTER
(Yes)
ENTER
(Yes)
SHIFT
22511
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments
Local zero and span
option
ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters are available with optional local zero
and span adjustments. This option is for applications that do not require
an SFC nor digital integration with our TPS system.
About local
adjustments
You must apply equivalent zero and span pressures to make the local
zero and span adjustments. This is similar to setting the LRV and URV
to applied pressures using the SFC.
After making any adjustments to the Smart Meter, keep the transmitter
powered for at least 30 seconds so that the new meter configuration is
written to non-volatile memory. If power is turned off before 30
seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous
settings.
ATTENTION
Procedure
The procedure in Table 27 shows the steps for setting the range values
to applied pressures using local zero and span adjustments. See Figure
32 for typical local adjustment connections and setup details.
Table 27
Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments
Step
1
Action
Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-
cap from terminal block side of electronics housing.
Observing polarity, connect a milliammeter across positive (+) and
negative (–) TEST terminals.
2
ATTENTION
If you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and
Span adjustment option, you may use the Local Smart Meter in place
of the milliammeter.
Continued on next page
84
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,
Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 27
Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments, continued
Step
3
Action
Loosen end-cap lock and remove end-cap from PWA side of
electronics housing to expose Local Zero and Span assembly or
Local Smart meter with Zero and Span adjustments.
Example – Local Zero and Span Assembly.
SPAN
ZERO
Example –Local Smart Meter with Zero and Span adjustments.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
SPAN
UNITS
SE T
ZERO
LOWER
VALUE
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,
Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 27
Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments, continued
Step
4
Action
Turn ON transmitter power and let it warm up for a few minutes.
Using an accurate pressure source, apply desired zero equivalent
pressure to transmitter.
ATTENTION
For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure
to the high pressure head for positive range values or vent both
heads to atmosphere for zero. If zero is to equal a negative value,
apply the equivalent pressure to the low pressure head. For
example, if zero is to equal –10 inH2O, you would apply 10 inH2O to
the low pressure head and vent the high pressure head for the zero
adjustment.
Check that milliammeter reading is 4 mA.
5
If reading …
Then…
is less or greater than 4 mA go to Step 6.
is correct
go to Step 7.
ATTENTION
If you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and
Span adjustment option, you may substitute the Local Smart Meter
readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with zero input
pressure applied assume that the meter reads 4 inH2O instead of 0
inH2O. In this case, the meter reading is greater than 0 (or 4 mA).
Example – Local Smart Meter displaying transmitter output in inches
of water.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
SPAN
UNITS
SE T
.
4 00
ANALOG
In H
O
ZERO
2
LOWER
VALUE
Continued on next page
86
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,
Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 27
Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments, continued
Step
6
Action
a. Press and hold ZERO button on Local Zero and Span assembly
or Local Smart Meter.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
SPAN
ZERO
UNITS
SET
Press &
Hold
%
.
1 00
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
ATTENTION
The Local Smart Meter readings revert to the default
unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the error code Er0
appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110
transmitter that does not support the Local Zero and Span
adjustments.
b. Press Decrease τ button once to complete this function.
ATTENTION
The Local Smart Meter display goes blank for a 1/2
second and then returns reading 0%.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
SPAN
UNITS
SE T
%
.
0 00
ANALOG
ZERO
LOWER
VALUE
Press once
Display goes
blank for 1/2
second and
returns with
zero reading
c. Check that milliammeter reading equals 4 mA and release ZERO
button.
ATTENTION
If milliammeter reading doesn’t change, be sure you
are not working with a model STD110 transmitter that ignores local
adjustments. The Local Smart Meter readings return to the set
engineering units after you release the ZERO button.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,
Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 27
Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments, continued
Step
7
Action
Using an accurate pressure source, apply pressure equivalent to
desired upper range value to transmitter.
ATTENTION
For differential pressure transmitters, apply pressure
to the high pressure head and be sure that the pressure to the low
pressure head is at its reference value.
Check that milliammeter reading is 20 mA.
8
If reading …
is not exactly 20 mA
is correct
Then…
go to Step 9.
go to Step 10.
ATTENTION
If you have the Local Smart Meter with Zero and
Span adjustment option, you may substitute the Local Smart Meter
readings for the milliammeter readings. For example, with URV input
pressure applied assume that the meter reads 396 inH2O instead of
400 inH2O. In this case, the meter reading is less than 100% (or 20
mA).
Example – Local Smart Meter displaying transmitter output in inches
of water.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
SPAN
UNITS
SE T
396
ANALOG
In H
O
ZERO
2
LOWER
VALUE
Continued on next page
88
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,
Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 27
Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments, continued
Step
9
Action
a. Press and hold SPAN button on Local Zero and Span assembly or
Local Smart Meter.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
Press &
Hold
0
100
%
SPAN
ZERO
UNITS
SET
%
.
99 0
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
ATTENTION
The Local Smart Meter readings revert to the default
unit of percent (%) during this operation. If the error code Er0
appears on the display, you are working with a model STD110
transmitter that does not support the Local Zero and Span
adjustments. If the error code Er4appears, you are trying to set a
SPAN value that is outside acceptable limits for your transmitter.
Readjust applied pressure to be within acceptable range limits and
repeat this procedure.
b. Press Increase σ button once to complete this function.
ATTENTION
The Local Smart Meter display goes blank for a 1/2
second and then returns reading 100%.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
SPAN
ZERO
UNITS
SET
%
.
100 0
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Display goes
blank for 1/2
second and
returns with
100% reading
Press once
c. Check that milliammeter reading equals 20 mA and release SPAN
button.
ATTENTION
If milliammeter reading doesn’t change, be sure you
are not working with a model STD110 transmitter that ignores local
adjustments. The Local Smart Meter readings return to the set
engineering units after you release the SPAN button.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.8
Setting Range Values Using Local Adjustments,
Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 27
Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span
Adjustments, continued
Step
10
Action
Wait 30 seconds so that changes have been copied to the
transmitter’s non-volatile memory.
Remove applied pressure and turn OFF transmitter power.
11
12
13
14
Replace end-cap on PWA side of electronics housing and tighten
lock.
Remove milliammeter from TEST terminals and replace end-cap and
tighten lock.
Turn ON transmitter power and check Local Smart Meter reading, if
applicable.
Figure 32
Typical Setup for Setting Range Values Using Local Zero and Span Adjustments.
ST 3000
+
Power
Supply
-
+
-
Receiver
Field
Terminals
250
Ω
Milliammeter
STR3015
90
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.9
Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only)
DE configuration
parameters
You must configure these additional parameters for a transmitter in the
DE mode of operation.
• Mode of Output Signal Indication
• Message Format
This section and the next section cover how to configure these
parameters individually. However, once you enter the DE configuration
function, you can access all DE configuration parameters serially
without exiting the function. Just use the [s NEXT ] and [t PREV] keys to
step through the parameter selections.
Background
You can select the output signal mode for digital transmission to be one
of these three modes as described in Table 20.
• Single Range
• Dual Range (STDC)
• Single Range W/SV
Procedure
The procedure in Table 28 outlines the steps for selecting a Single
Range W/SV mode for example purposes only.
Table 28
Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Initiate shift key selection.
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
P
F
T
T
3
Ø 1
1
^
SHIFT
I
–
G
g
Calls up DE CONFIG menu. Output
signal mode selection appears.
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
D
E
C
O N
F
P
I
T
3
.
0
1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
R
R
N
.
.
D
S
E
C
g
O N
F
F
P
a
T
n
3
e
0
1
1
i
n
n
l
e
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
Calls up next output signal mode
selection.
2
D
S
E
i
C
g
O N
P
n
T
g
3
0
/
1
1
l
e
w
S V
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
Repeatedly press [MENU ITEM] key to
step through all output signal mode
selections listed in Table 20 in
sequence. Stop when “Single Range
W/SV” mode is on display.
D
D
E
u
C
l
O N
R
F
a
P
g
T
e
3
0
1
1
(
)
a
n
S T D C
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.9
Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only), Continued
Procedure , continued
Table 28
Step
3
Selecting Mode of Output Signal Indication, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
Enters change in SFC and calls up
next DE configuration parameter.
This action only applies if selection
is changed. Otherwise, must press
[CLR] key to exit function or [s NEXT]
key to call up next parameter.
D
E
E
C
O N
F
E
P
P
T
I
3
0
1
1
N
o
T E
R
D
4
N
y
S
F C
ENTER
(Yes)
D
w
E
/
C
O N
F
(
T
B
3
t
0
e
1
)
1
D B
Prompt asks if change entered in
SFC is to be downloaded to
4
D
D
E
C
O N
F
P
T
3
0
1
1
CLR
(NO)
O W N L O A
D
C
H
A N G E ?
transmitter. If you want to download
change, go to Step 5. If you do not
want to download change, press
[CLR] key to exit function. This action
only applies when Step 3 is valid.
Otherwise, this keystroke exits DE
CONF function.
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
5
D
S
E
F
C
O N
F
P
I
T
3
0
.
1
.
1
C
W O R
K
.
N
G .
ENTER
(Yes)
Parameter change is loaded in
transmitter. SFC is ready for next
function.
L
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
Ø 1
1
R
A D Y .
Continued on next page
92
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.9
Selecting Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only), Continued
Keystroke summary
Figure 33 shows keystroke summary for selecting the mode of output
signal indication for transmitter in DE mode for quick reference.
Figure 33
Keystroke Summary for Selecting Mode of Output Signal
Indication.
DE CONF
I
^
MENU
SHIFT
ITEM
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
CLR
(No)
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
22513
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.10
Selecting Message Format (DE Mode Only)
Background
You can select one of these broadcast formats for the digital signal
transmission as described in Table 20.
• 4-Byte type
• 6-Byte type
Procedure
The procedure in Table 29 outlines the steps for selecting a 6-Byte type
format for example purposes only.
Table 29
Selecting Message Format
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Initiate shift key selection.
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
P
F
T
T
3
Ø 1
1
^
SHIFT
I
–
Calls up DE CONFIG menu. Output
signal mode selection appears.
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
D
E
C
O N
F
P
I
T
3
.
0
1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
R
4
N
G
.
.
D
S
E
C
g
O N
F
P
n
T
g
3
0
/
1
1
i
n
o
l
e
w
S V
Calls up next DE CONFIG menu
item - Message format selection
appears.
H
2
3
D
w
E
/
C
O N
F
P
T
B
3
t
0
e
1
)
1
1
(
NEXT
D B
y
y
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
Calls up next message format
selection. Repeatedly press [MENU
ITEM] key to cycle between two
format selections. See Table 19 for
details. Stop when “w/DB (6 Byte)”
selection is on display.
D
E
w
C
O N
F
P
T
B
3
t
0
e
1
)
(
/
D B
6
NON-VOL
4
Enters change in SFC and calls up
next DE configuration parameter.
This action only applies if selection
is changed. Otherwise, must press
[CLR] key to exit function, [s NEXT]
key to call up next parameter, or
[t PREV] key to call up previous
parameter.
D
E
E
C
O N
F
E
P
T
I
3
0
1
1
ENTER
(Yes)
N
S
T E
R
D
/
N
S
F C
D
F
E
/
C
O N
=
F
B
P
T
3
o
0
1
1
O
L
Prompt asks if change entered in
SFC is to be downloaded to
5
D
D
E
C
O N
F
P
T
3
0
1
1
CLR
(NO)
O W N L O A
D
C
H
A N G E ?
transmitter. If you want to download
change, go to Step 6. If you do not
want to download change, press
[CLR] key to exit function. This action
only applies when Step 4 is valid.
Otherwise, this keystroke exits DE
CONF function.
Continued on next page
94
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.10
Selecting Message Format (DE Mode Only), Continued
Procedure , continued
Table 29
Step
6
Selecting Message Format, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
Message exchange is working.
D
S
E
F
C
O N
F
P
I
T
3
0
.
1
.
1
C
W O R
K
N
G .
ENTER
(Yes)
Parameter change is loaded in
transmitter. SFC is ready for next
function.
L
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
Ø 1
1
R
A D Y .
.
Keystroke summary
Figure 34 shows keystroke summary for selecting the message format for
transmitter in DE mode for quick reference.
Figure 34
Keystroke Summary for Selecting Message Format.
DE CONF
I
^
MENU
SHIFT
ITEM
H
NEXT
DE CONF
I
MENU
ITEM
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
CLR
(No)
NON-VOL
ENTER
(Yes)
22514
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.11
Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC
Background
You can select an available engineering unit or enter a custom one
including upper and lower limit settings for the Local Smart Meter’s
digital readout through the SFC.
Configuring the Smart
Meter
• If you initiate an SFC command at the same time a button is pressed
on the Local Smart Meter, the Local Smart Meter will respond to the
command it receives last. In other words, the last command wins.
• The Local Smart Meter does not have to be installed for you to
configure it through the SFC. The meter’s configuration data is stored
in memory on the transmitter’s PWA rather than in the meter itself.
Transmitter Output
Conformity and Smart
Meter Configuration
Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the
transmitter’s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square
root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or
square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or
output form. (See Subsection 6.4 for more details.)
When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output
measurement, there are certain rules to keep in mind which are
dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described
in the following paragraphs.
1. The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the
engineering units you can select for the smart meter display.
• When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of
LINEAR, you can select only pressure type engineering units.
(See Table 31.)
• When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of
SQUARE ROOT, you can select only flow type engineering
units GPM and GPH.
• The percent and custom engineering units can be selected
regardless of output conformity configuration.
2. Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the
lower and upper display limits to represent transmitter’s 0 to 100%
output.
• If you select pressure type engineering units, you cannot set the
lower or upper display limits. These values are automatically set
when you select the engineering units.
• You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is
configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity. The lower
display limit is fixed at zero (0) for a transmitter in square root
mode and cannot be changed.
Continued on next page
96
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.11
Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued
Transmitter Output
Conformity and Smart
Meter Configuration,
continued
• You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you
have selected custom engineering units (Custom) and the
transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR.
When setting the lower and upper display limits, if you let either
the lower or upper display limit setting time out (after thirty
seconds), the meter will discard the newly set values and will
revert to its previous settings. The meter forces you to set both
limits by automatically initiating the next limit setting, either
lower or upper, depending upon which limit you set first.
3. If you change the transmitter’s output conformity, you must
reconfigure the local smart meter as outlined in Table 30.
After making any adjustments to the smart meter, keep the transmitter
powered for at least 30 seconds so that the new meter configuration is
written to non-volatile memory. If power is turned off before 30
seconds, the changes may not be saved so that when the transmitter
power is restored, the meter configuration will revert to the previous
settings.
ATTENTION
Procedure
The procedure in Table 30 outlines the steps for setting up the
configuration for a Local Smart Meter using an SFC.
Table 30
Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
B
Calls up first configuration prompt.
S
F
T
C
O
I
N F
I
G
CONF
C
O
M
N
e
O R
M
T
Y
?
H
Calls up next configuration prompt.
Prompt asks if you want to access
meter configuration function. If you
want to access it, go to Step 3. If
you do not want to access it, press
[CLR] key to exit function or [s NEXT]
key to call up next configuration
parameter.
2
S
t
T
C
O
C
N F
I
f
G
i
g
e
r
o
n
?
NEXT
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.11
Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 30
Step
3
Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
M
F
e
t
e
r
C
o
I
n
f
i
g
.
Enters meter configuration function
and confirms that Local Smart Meter
is present. Timed prompt - Proceed
to Step 4.
S
C
O
R K
N
G .
.
W
ENTER
(YES)
M
e
t
e
r
r
C
o
n
f
i
g
M
e
t
e
B
d
P
r
e s
t
e
n
ATTENTION
If prompt “No Meter
Present” appears, prompt times out
in a few seconds, as described
above, and calls up the Configure
Meter? prompt. This means that
you can access the meter
configuration function without the
Local Smart Meter installed.
Proceed to Step 4. If prompt “Mtr
not Supportd” appears, prompt
times out and returns to previous ST
CONFIG prompt (See Step 2.). This
means that you are working with a
pre-release 300 transmitter that
does not support the Local Smart
Meter option and, therefore, can not
access the meter configuration
function.
M
o
e
n
t
e
i
r
C
r
o
n
f
i
g
t
Prompt asks if you want to configure
Local Smart Meter. If you want to
configure it, go to Step 5. If you do
not want to configure it, press [CLR]
key to exit function.
4
C
f
u
e
M
e
e
r
?
g
Continued on next page
98
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.11
Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 30
Step
5
Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
M e
t
e
r
E
n
g
U
t
s
n
i
Calls up present meter Engineering
Unit selection. (Note that unit
“H2O_39F is shown for example
purposes only.)
_
"
H
2
O
9
F
3
ENTER
(YES)
MmHg_0C
PSI
DECONF
I
MENU
ITEM
Repeatedly press [MENU ITEM] key to
step through other selections. For
example purposes, stop when PSI
unit is on display.
KPa
MPa
mBAR
BAR
g/cm^2
Kg/cm^2
mmH2O_4C
inHg_32F
mH2O_4C
GPM
GPH
Custom
%
6
If EU is …
Then…
Custom, GPM,
or GPH
go to Step 7.
other than
Custom, GPM,
or GPH
go to Step 13.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.11
Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 30
Step
7
Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
M e
t
e
r
E
n
I
g
U
t
s
s
n
.
i
Selected engineering unit is
S
D
S
F
C
O
R K
N
G .
.
downloaded to transmitter and
high/low display limit setting function
is initiated. (Note that Custom unit is
shown for example purposes only.)
W
ENTER
(YES)
M e
t
e
r
E
n
g
l
U
t
n
i
a
t
o
w n
o
a d
e
d
a
D
i
E
F
n
g
U
O
t
s
H
-
.
L
o
n
i
C
R K
I
N
G .
.
W
H
ATTENTION
If you select GPM
or GPH unit with the transmitter in its
LINEAR mode, the prompts
E
>
U
R
i
C
u
o
m
s
t
N G
E
A
“INVALID REQUEST”, “Download
Error”, and “MtrNotInFlowMode” are
sequentially displayed after the SFC
WORKING. . . prompt and display
returns to the Configure Meter
prompt. Transmitter must be in its
SQUARE ROOT (Flow) mode for
GPM or GPH to be a valid unit
selection.
Press [τ PREV] key , if you want to
view present high and low display
limits loaded in the transmitter.
S
5
E
5
U
_
H
H
i
i
i
C
C
C
u
u
u
o
o
o
m
m
m
s
s
s
t
t
t
Key in 525 as upper display limit for
Custom unit.
8
W
2
E
5
U
2
ATTENTION
The display range
_
5
of the meter is ±19,990,000. If you
enter larger values, they will not be
displayed.
S
5
E
5
U
2
H
_
NON-VOL
E
N
U
T
H
R
i
C
N
u
u
o
m
m
s
t
Enters upper display limit in SFC
and calls up lower display limit
setting.
9
E
E D
I
S
F
C
E
A
ENTER
(YES)
E
>
U
R
L
o
C
C
C
o
o
o
s
s
s
t
t
t
N G
E
E
_
U
L
L
o
o
u
u
m
m
Key in –5 as lower display limit for
Custom unit in transmitter
configured for LINEAR output mode.
(Note that lower limit value is
referenced to configured LRV.)
10
+
_
-
-
E
5
U
_
S
5
ATTENTION
Zero (0) is only
valid entry for GPM or GPH unit, or
CUSTOM unit with transmitter in
SQUARE ROOT output mode.
Continued on next page
100
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.11
Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 30
Step
Setting Up Local Smart Meter Configuration Using an SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
E
N
U
T
L
o
C
N
u
o
m
s
t
Enters lower display limit in SFC
and prompt asks if you want to enter
changes in transmitter. If you want
to enter changes, go to Step 12. If
you do not want to enter changes,
press [CLR] key to exit function.
11
E
E
R
E D
I
S
F
C
E
ENTER
(YES)
E
N
n
T
g
U
t
s
H
i
-
L
o
n
i
R
C
H
A
N G E
S
?
E
NON-VOL
i
E
F
n
g
U
O
t
I
s
H
-
L
o
o
n
i
Downloads changes to transmitter
and returns to Configure Meter?
prompt. Press [CLR] key to return to
ST CONFIG menu. Skip Step 13.
12
13
S
D
C
S
D
C
R K
N
G .
.
.
W
ENTER
(YES)
E
a
n
t
g
a
U
D
t
s
l
H
i
-
L
d
n
o
i
w n
o
a d
e
M
o
e
n
t
f
e
i
r
C
r
o
n
f
i
g
u
e
M
e
t
e
r
t
?
s
g
NON-VOL
M e
t
e
r
E
n
I
g
U
n
.
i
Downloads selected pressure
engineering unit to transmitter.
Press [CLR] key to return to ST
CONFIG menu.
F
C
O
R K
N
G .
.
W
ENTER
(YES)
M e
t
e
r
E
n
g
l
U
t
s
n
i
a
t
o
w n
o
o
a d
e
d
a
D
ATTENTION
If you select a
M e
t
e
o
r
t
E
n
g
l
U
t
s
n
i
pressure unit with the transmitter in
its SQUARE ROOT (Flow) mode,
the prompts “INVALID REQUEST”
and “Download Error” are
M t
r
I
n
F
w M o d e
N
M
e
n
t
f
e
i
r
C
r
o
n
f
i
g
t
C
o
u
e
M
e
e
r
?
g
sequentially displayed after the SFC
WORKING. . . prompt and the EU Hi
prompt is called up for display. At
this point, you can change the upper
display limit as shown in Step 8 or
press the [σ NEXT] key to call up the
EU Lo prompt. See Step 10 to
change the lower display limit or
press the [σ NEXT] key and then the
[CLR] key to exit the function.
If you selected one of these engineering
units: %,
If selected engineering unit does not
match one of six unit indicators on
meter, you can use a stick-on label
from Honeywell drawing 30756918-
001. Just peel off matching
engineering unit label from drawing
and carefully paste it in lower right
hand corner of display.
14
inH2O,
mmHg,
PSI,
GPM, or
GPH;
verify that corresponding unit indicator is
lit on Local Smart Meter display.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.11
Configuring Smart Meter Using SFC, Continued
Keystroke summary
Figure 35 shows the keystroke summary for configuring the Local Smart
Meter using the SFC for quick reference.
Figure 35
Keystroke Summary for Configuring Local Smart Meter.
B
CONF
NON-VOL
ENTER
(YES)
H
Custom, GPM,
or GPH unit only
NEXT
Number
Hi Limit
NON-VOL
NON-VOL
ENTER
(YES)
ENTER
(YES)
Meter Not
Supported
NON-VOL
Lo Limit
Number
ENTER
(YES)
NON-VOL
ENTER
(YES)
DECONF
I
MENU
ITEM
NON-VOL
NON-VOL
ENTER
(YES)
ENTER
(YES)
CLR
(NO)
102
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons
Background
The local smart meter can be set to show the PV out in engineering units
that are appropriate for your process application. You can select an
available engineering unit or enter a custom one including upper and
lower display limit settings for the local smart meter’s digital readout
using buttons on the face of the meter.
Using the Smart
Meter
Follow these guidelines when configuring the local smart meter:
• If you initiate an SFC command at the same time a button is pressed
on the local smart meter, the local smart meter will respond to the
command it receives last. In other words, the last command wins.
• In most cases, you can press and release a button for one-shot
operation, or press and hold a button for continuous, 1/2 second,
repetitive operation.
• Active setup field will begin to flash at one second rate if next action
is not initiated within one second. And, if no action is taken within
30 seconds, the setup function will time out and the meter will return
to its previous state.
Table 31 shows an illustration of the local smart meter and a description
of the pushbuttons on the meter face.
Table 31
Smart Meter Pushbutton Description
Smart Meter Pushbuttons
Pushbutton
Function
VAR SEL.
Not functional when installed with
ST 3000 transmitters.
SPAN
ZERO
Selects Span range setting (URV).
Selects Zero range setting (LRV).
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
UPPER VALUE
Selects Upper Range Value setting
(URV).
UNITS
SET
SPAN
ZERO
o
o
C
F
%
-
.
FLOW
8
8 80
1
UNITS SET
Selects engineering units for meter
display.
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
FAULT - LAST
KNOWN VALUE
ANALOG
In H
O
LOWER
VALUE
2
mmHg
GPH
K GPM
A
PSI
LOWER VALUE
Selects Lower Range Value (LRV).
Decrease pushbutton
τ
σ
Increase pushbutton
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Transmitter Output
Conformity and Smart
Meter Configuration
Normally when using a differential type transmitter, you can select the
transmitter’s output to represent a straight linear calculation or a square
root calculation for flow measurement applications. This linear or
square root output parameter selection is called output conformity or
output form. (See Subsection 6.4 for more details.)
When configuring the smart meter to display the transmitter output
measurement, there are certain rules to keep in mind which are
dependent on the output conformity selection. These rules are described
in the following paragraphs.
1. The output conformity setting of the transmitter restricts the
engineering units you can select for the smart meter display.
• When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of
LINEAR, you can select only pressure type engineering units.
(See Table 32.)
• When the transmitter is configured for an output conformity of
SQUARE ROOT, you can select only flow type engineering
units GPM and GPH.
• The percent and custom engineering units can be selected
regardless of output conformity configuration.
2. Additionally, the output conformity setting restricts the setting of the
lower and upper display limits to represent transmitter’s 0 to 100%
output.
• If you select pressure type engineering units, you cannot set the
lower or upper display limits. These values are automatically set
when you select the engineering units.
• You can set only the upper display limit when the transmitter is
configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity. The lower
display limit is fixed at zero (0) for a transmitter in square root
mode and cannot be changed.
• You can set both the lower and upper display limits when you
have selected custom engineering units (EUF) and the
transmitter output conformity is set to LINEAR.
When setting the lower and upper display limits, if you let either the
lower or upper display limit setting time out (after thirty seconds), the
meter will discard the newly set values and will revert to its previous
settings. The meter forces you to set both limits by automatically
initiating the next limit setting, either lower or upper, depending upon
which limit you set first.
3. If you change the transmitter’s output conformity, you must
reconfigure the Local Smart meter as outlined in Tables 33 to 36.
Continued on next page
104
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Transmitter Output
Conformity and Smart
Meter Configuration,
continued
Table 32
Smart Meter Engineering Units Code
Smart Meter Code
Engineering Unit
Transmitter Output
Conformity
EU0
EU1
EU2
EU3
EU4
EU5
EU6
EU7
EU8
%
*
*
Linear or Square Root
in H O
2
mmHg
PSI
*
*
kPa
†
†
†
†
MPa
mbar
bar
Linear
2
g/cm
†
†
2
EU9
kg/cm
EUA
EUB
EUC
EUD
EUE
EUF
mmH O †
2
inHg
†
†
mH O
2
GPM
*
*
†
Square Root
Square Root
GPH
Custom
Linear or Square Root
*
†
These selections have indicators on smart meter display.
Use stick-on labels provided for other engineering units.
Selecting Engineering
Units
The procedure in Table 33 outlines the steps for selecting the desired
engineering units for a Local Smart Meter using its local adjustments on
the face of the meter. You will be selecting the unit of measurement
that you want the smart meter to indicate during normal operation.
When the transmitter’s end-cap is removed, the housing is not
explosionproof.
WARNING
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Selecting Engineering
Units, continued
Table 33
Selecting Engineering Units
Step
1
Action
Meter Display
Loosen lock on meter end-cap and unscrew
cap from housing. Be sure transmitter power
is ON.
Typical display for meter in transmitter that
has no previous meter configuration stored in
its memory.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
%
.
0 00
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Appears when
transmitter is in
its Analog mode.
2
Press UNITS SET button.
Display shows code for current engineering
units setting.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
%
EU
0
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Continued on next page
106
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Selecting Engineering
Units, continued
Table 33
Selecting Engineering Units, continued
Step
3
Action
Meter Display
Press Increase σ key to call up next code or
Decrease τ button call up previous code.
Repeat this action until desired code is on
display.
Selection codes for engineering units
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
You can hold down the Increase or Decrease
key to scroll forward or backward through the
codes.
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
EU
1
ANALOG
In H
O
LOWER
VALUE
2
ATTENTION
Remember that if transmitter
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
is configured for SQUARE ROOT output
conformity the only valid code selections are
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
EU0 = %*
EU1 = inH2O*
EU0(%)
EU2 = mmHg*
EU3 = PSI*
EU4 = KPa
EU5 = MPa
EU6 = mbar
EU7 = bar
EUD(GPM)
EUE (GPH)
EUF(Custom)
EU8 = g/cm2
EU9 = Kg/cm2
EUA = mmH2O
If transmitter is configured for LINEAR output
conformity EU0(%) to EUCand EUF
(CUSTOM) are valid code selections.
EUB = inHg
EUC = mH2O
*These selections
have indicators on
the display.
EUD = GPM*
EUE = GPH*
EUF = Custom
4
Press UNITS SET button to lock in selected
code.
Goes blank for 1/2 second and returns with
reading in engineering units
ATTENTION
If you select an invalid code
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
according to the selections in Step 3, the
meter display will show an error code Er1 for
one second and then return to the previous
engineering units selection.
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
.
0 18
ANALOG
In H
O
LOWER
VALUE
2
Digital reading now
in engineering units
of inches of water
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Selecting Engineering
Units, continued
Table 33
Selecting Engineering Units, continued
Step
5
Action
Meter Display
If selected engineering unit does not match
one of six unit indicators on meter, peel off
matching stick-on unit label from sheet
(drawing number 30756918-001) and paste it
in lower right hand corner of meter.
Use stick-on label for engineering units
without indicators on display.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
.
1 02
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Kg/cm2
Stick-on label
identifies selected
engineering units
6
If you selected Custom or Flow engineering
units, go to Tables 35 and 36 to set lower and set for Custom or Flow engineering units.
upper display limits for smart meter display.
Lower and upper display limits have not been
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
-
U L
FLOW
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
GPM
108
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Lower and
Upper Display Values
The Table 34 shows the restrictions on setting the display values for
given engineering units and output conformity selections.
Table 34
Smart Meter Restrictions for Setting Display Values
Engineering
Units code
Output
Conformity
Linear
Set
Lower Display Value?
Upper Display Value?
EU0 through EUC
(Pressure type units)
EU0, EUD, EUE,and EUF
(%, GPM, GPH, or Custom)
EUF
No (set automatically)
No (set automatically)
Square root
Linear
No (fixed at zero)
Yes
Use Table 36
Yes
Yes
(Custom)
Use Table 35
Use Table 36
Setting Lower and
Upper Display Values
To set the lower and upper display limit values for the meter display
perform the procedures in Tables 35 and 36. Also note that in each
procedure you must:
• First set the magnitude range for each display value. This enables
the multiplier (K) on the display for indicating larger ranges (greater
than 19999 and shifts the decimal point of the digital display left or
right depending on the precision you want to show for that value).
• Next set the display value. This procedure sets the display limit of
the meter to represent minimum and maximim transmitter output
(0% and 100 % output).
Note: Magnitude range and display values are set for both upper and
lower (if applicable) display limits.
During normal operation, the display range of the meter digital readout
is ±19,990,000 and is automatically ranged to provide the best precision
possible for the digits available up to 1/100th of a unit.
Setting Lower Display
Values
The procedure in Table 35 outlines the steps for setting the lower
display limit to represent the 0 percent (LRV) output of the transmitter.
For example purposes, the procedures in Tables 35 and 36 assume that
the lower value is to be set at 0 and the upper value is to be set at
19,990,000 for a CUSTOM unit in a transmitter with a LINEAR output,
and the transmitter’s present output is exactly 50 percent.
ATTENTION
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Lower Display
Values, continued
Table 35
Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display
Step
1
Action
Meter Display
You have completed units selection in Table
33 and U-Lappears on the display. Press
LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower
display limit setting function.
If lower limit display value was previously set,
KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value
flashes in display.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
ATTENTION
This procedure is only
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
applicable for Custom (EUF) engineering unit
selection in a transmitter configured for
LINEAR output conformity.
0.00
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
KNOWN VALUE
The lower display value for transmitters
configured for SQUARE ROOT output
conformity is fixed at zero (0.00) and cannot
be changed.
Previously set
value flashes in
display and
indicator lights
Display shows magnitude range selection.
2
Press LOWER VALUE button again within 5
seconds. Otherwise, meter exits limit setting
function.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
19 .99
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
ATTENTION
The magnitude range
selection only applies for setting the display
limits. This selection does not affect the
normal operation of the meter. During normal
operation, the display is automatically ranged
to provide the best precision possible.
Continued on next page
110
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Lower Display
Values, continued
Table 35
Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display, continued
Step
3
Action
Meter Display
Press Increase σ button to call up next
available magnitude range selection or
Decrease τ button to call up previous
magnitude range selection.
Magnitude range selections.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
NOTE: This action enables the multiplier (K)
for indicating larger ranges and shifts
the decimal point of the digital display
left or right depending on which button
is pushed. The display shows largest
positive number for given range
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
19 .99
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
selection so you can select a range
that is just larger than the range to be
set for best display precision. Hold
respective key to scroll forward or
backward through the selections.
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
19.99
199.9
1999
19.99K*
199.9K*
1999K*
19990K*
*The "K" multiplier
indicator appears
below the digital
Repeat this action until desired selection is on
display.
reading on the display.
4
Press LOWER VALUE button to initiate lower
value setting.
Readout goes blank except for first active digit
which will be 0 unless lower value was set
before.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
0
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Lower Display
Values, continued
Table 35
Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display, continued
Step
5
Action
Meter Display
First digit value setting.
Press Increase σ button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease τ button to
select the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
6
7
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in first
digit and activate next active digit.
0
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Readout now displays next active digit which
will be zero unless lower value was set
before.
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Press Increase σ button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease τ button to
select the previous digit value.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.
8
9
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in
second digit and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which
will be zero unless lower value was set
before.
Press Increase σ button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease τ button to
select the previous digit value.
Third digit value setting.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
0.00
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
112
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Lower Display
Values, continued
Table 35
Setting Lower Display Values for Smart Meter Display, continued
Step
10
Action
Meter Display
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in third
digit and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which
will be BLANK unless lower value was set to 1
before.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
"1" digit is
BLANK or 1
%
UNITS
SE T
0.00
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
11
12
Press Increase σ button to set digit to 1 or
Decrease τ button to set it to BLANK.
“1” digit value setting.
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock-in “1”
digit and activate sign segment.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
Readout now displays sign segment which
will be BLANK for positive values unless lower
value was set for negative (–) values before.
0.00
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Press to set "1"
digit as BLANK
Press to set "1"
digit as 1
13
14
Press Increase σ button to set sign segment
to minus sign for negative values or Decrease
τ button to set it to BLANK for positive values.
Sign segment setting.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
Press LOWER VALUE button to lock in
current settings as lower display value limit.
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
ATTENTION
0.00
For CUSTOM unit in
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
transmitter with LINEAR output, you must set
both lower and upper display limits for values
to take effect. If you let either the lower or
upper display limit time out (after 30 seconds),
the meter discards both newly set values and
reverts back to the previously set values.
Press to set sign
segment as
BLANK for
Press to set sign
segment as minus
sign (-) for negative
values
positive values
•
•
If you have not yet set the upper display limit value, the meter automatically enters the upper display
setting function after it displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table 36.
If you have already set the upper display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display
limits setting function for Custom engineering units in the transmitter. Meter returns to normal
operation.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Upper Display
Values
The procedure in Table 36 outlines the steps for setting the upper
display limit to represent the 100 percent (URV) output of the
transmitter.
This procedure applies only for Flow units (GPM or GPH) in a
transmitter configured for SQUARE ROOT output conformity, or
CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for linear or square root
output conformity.
ATTENTION
Table 36
Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display
Step
1
Action
Meter Display
Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper
display limit setting function.
If upper limit display value was previously set,
KNOWN VALUE indicator lights and set value
flashes in display.
2
Press UPPER VALUE button again within 5
seconds. Otherwise, meter exits limit setting
function.
Display shows magnitude range selection.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
19 .99
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
ATTENTION
The magnitude range
selection only applies for setting the display
limits. This selection does not affect the
normal operation of the meter. During normal
operation, the display is automatically ranged
to provide the best precision possible.
Continued on next page
114
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Upper Display
Values, continued
Table 36
Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued
Step
3
Action
Meter Display
Magnitude range selections with largest range
selected.
Press Increase σ button to call up next
available magnitude range selection or
Decrease τ button to call up previous
magnitude range selection.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
NOTE: This action enables the multiplier (K)
for indicating larger ranges and shifts
the decimal point of the digital display
left or right depending on which button
is pushed. The display shows largest
positive number for given range
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
19 990
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
selection so you can select a range
that is just larger than the range to be
set for best display precision. Hold
respective key to scroll forward or
backward through the selections.
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through selections
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through selections
19.99
199.9
1999
Repeat this action until desired selection is on
display. For example purposes only, largest
range 19990K is selected in this procedure.
19.99K*
199.9K*
1999K*
19990K*
*The "K" multiplier
indicator appears
below the digital
reading on the display.
4
Press UPPER VALUE button to initiate upper
value setting.
Readout goes blank except for first active digit
which will be 0 unless upper value was set
before.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
00
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Upper Display
Values, continued
Table 36
Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued
Step
5
Action
Meter Display
Press Increase σ button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease τ button to
select the previous digit value.
First digit value setting is set to 9.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display – use 9 for example purposes.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
90
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6
7
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in first
digit and activate next active digit.
Readout now displays next active digit which
will be zero unless upper value was set
before.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
Press Increase σ button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease τ button to
select the previous digit value.
090
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display – use 9 for example purposes.
Continued on next page
116
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Upper Display
Values, continued
Table 36
Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued
Step
8
Action
Meter Display
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in
second digit and activate next active digit.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
Readout now displays next active digit which
will be zero unless upper value was set
before.
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
0990
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
9
Press Increase σ button to select the next
available digit value or Decrease τ button to
select the previous digit value.
Next digit value setting is set to 9.
Repeat this action until desired value is on
display – use 9 for example purposes.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
10
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in third
digit and activate next active digit.
9990
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
Readout now displays next active digit which
will be BLANK unless upper value was set to
1 before.
Press and hold to
scroll backward
through values
Press and hold to
scroll forward
through values
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Upper Display
Values, continued
Table 36
Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued
Step
11
Action
Meter Display
Press Increase σ button to set digit to 1 or
Decrease τ button to set it to BLANK.
“1” digit value setting is set to 1.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
19990
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
Press to set "1"
digit as BLANK
Press to set "1"
digit as 1
12
13
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock-in “1”
digit and activate sign segment.
Readout now displays sign segment which
will be BLANK for positive values unless
upper value was set for negative (–) values
before.
Press Increase σ button to set sign segment
to minus sign for negative values or Decrease
τ button to set it to BLANK. for positive values.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
19990
Sign segment
is BLANK for
positive values
and minus sign
for negative
values
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
Continued on next page
118
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Setting Upper Display
Values, continued
Table 36
Setting Upper Display Value for Smart Meter Display, continued
Step
14
Action
Meter Display
Display goes blank for a 1/2 second and
returns to display readout equal to 50%
output.
Press UPPER VALUE button to lock in
current settings as upper display value and
return to previous display. Upper display limit
setting is now complete.
In this example, readout is 9, 990,000
CUSTOM unit for 50% display range of 0 to
19,990,000 CUSTOM for transmitter with
LINEAR output.
ATTENTION
For CUSTOM unit in
transmitter with LINEAR output, you must set
both lower and upper display limits for values
to take effect. If you let either the lower or
upper display limit time out (after 30 seconds),
the meter discards both newly set values and
reverts back to the previously set values.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
9990
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
K
•
•
•
If you have not yet set the lower display limit value for CUSTOM unit in a transmitter configured for
LINEAR output mode, the meter automatically enters the lower display setting function after it
displays previously set value, if applicable. Go to Table 35, Step 3.
If you have already set the lower display limit value, this completes the lower and upper display limits
setting function for CUSTOM unit in transmitter configured for LINEAR output mode. Meter returns to
normal operation as shown in example display below.
If you have just set the upper display limit for Flow unit or CUSTOM unit in transmitter configured for
SQUARE ROOT output mode, this completes the limit setting function. Meter returns to normal
operation as shown in example display below.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Button Pushing
Summary
Figure 36 shows button pushing summary for the smart meter display to
select the engineering units.
Figure 36
Button Pushing Summary for Selecting Engineering Units.
Start
Units
Set
EU8 = g/cm2
Select Unit: EU0 = %
EU9 = Kg/cm2
EUA = mmH2O
EU1 = inH2O
EU2 =mmHg
EU3 = PSI
EUB = inHg
EU4 = KPa
EU5 = MPa
EU6 = mbar
EU7 = bar
EUC = mH2O
EUD = GPM
EUE = GPH
EUF = Custom
Units
Set
NO
Is
EUD, EUE or EUF
selected?
YES
A
End
Continued on next page
120
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.12
Configuring Smart Meter Using Pushbuttons, Continued
Button Pushing
Summary
Figure 37 shows button pushing summary for the smart meter display to
set the lower and upper display limits.
Figure 37
Button Pushing Summary for Setting Lower and Upper Display Limits.
A
Is
NO
EUD or EUE
selected?
YES
Is
EUF in LINEARor
SQUARE ROOT
SQUARE ROOT
mode?
Mode
Lower
Value
Upper
Value
LINEAR
Mode
No
Is "1" digit active?
Set Lower
Set Upper
Yes
Range Value
Range Value
Set 1 digit to BLANK
Set 1 digit to 1
Lower
Value
Upper
Value
Lower
Value
Upper
Value
If display limit was previously set, KNOWN VALUEindicator lights
and set value flashes in display.(Note that lower display limit is
fixed at zero (0.00) for units in SQUARE ROOT mode.)
Set sign segment
BLANK for positive
values
Set sign segment
to minus sign (-) for
negative values
Lower
Value
Upper
Value
Lower
Value
Upper
Value
Set magnitude range: 19.99, 199.9, 1999,
19.99K, 199.9K, 1999K, 19990K
Lower
Value
Upper
Value
No
Are both lower and
upper display limit
values set?
Yes
Set active digit value 0 to 9
End
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.13
Disconnecting SFC
Considerations
• Be sure a “#” character does not appear on the right side of the SFC
display indicating that the transmitter may be in its current output
mode, or the SFC has detected a non-critical status condition.
L
R
V
1
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
5
.
Ø Ø Ø Ø
i
n
H
2
O
– Example:
If the # character is on the display, press the [OUTPUT] key and then the
[CLR] key to remove the transmitter from the current output mode, or
press the [STAT] key to check the operating status of the transmitter.
INPUT
J
O U
T
T
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1 #
1 #
1 #
OUT-
PUT
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
– Example:
O U
P
5
1
P
T
3
0
0
1
1
Ø . Ø Ø
%
CLR
(NO)
O U
P
1
W O R
P
I
T
3
S
F C
K
.
N G .
.
.
L
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
0
1
1
R
A D Y .
• Be sure to store all changes in the transmitters non-volatile memory by
pressing the [SHIFT] key and then the [ENTER] key.
^
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
P
F
T
T
3
0
1
1
SHIFT
I
–
– Example:
NON-VOL
L
I
N
D
P
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
ENTER
(Yes)
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
L
I
N
D
N
P
P T
3
0
1
I
1
D
A
T
A
O N
V
O L A T
L E
L
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
0
1
1
R
A D Y .
.
WARNING
• Be sure to disconnect the SFC leads from the transmitter before
unplugging them from the SFC.
• Be sure the SFC is disconnected from a transmitter in the analog
mode before returning the loop to the automatic operating mode.
122
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7 —Startup
7.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics
Section
Topic
See Page
7.1 Introduction ................................................................................123
7.2 Startup Tasks.............................................................................124
7.3 Running Analog Output Check...................................................125
7.4 Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter ....................................128
7.5 Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter .............................131
7.6 Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank..................................133
7.7 Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank..........................136
7.8 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP Transmitter.....140
7.9 Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with
Flush Mount Transmitter ............................................................144
7.10 Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter..............................145
7.11 Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with
Remote Seals.............................................................................147
About this section
This section identifies typical startup tasks associated with several
generic pressure measurement applications. It also includes the
procedure for running an optional analog output check.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.2
Startup Tasks
About startup
Once you have installed and configured a transmitter, you are ready to
start up the process loop. Startup usually includes
• Applying process pressure to the transmitter,
• Checking zero input, and
• Reading input and output.
You can also run an optional output check to “ring out” an analog loop
prior to startup.
Procedure reference
The actual steps in a startup procedure will vary based on the type of
transmitter and the measurement application. In general, we use the SFC
to check the transmitter’s input and output under static process
conditions, and make adjustments as required before putting the
transmitter into full operation with the running process.
Choose the applicable procedure to reference in this section from Table
37 based on your type of transmitter and the measurement application.
The reference procedure will give you some idea of the typical tasks
associated with starting up a transmitter in a given application.
Table 37
Startup Procedure Reference
IF transmitter type
is . . .
AND application is . . .
THEN reference
procedure in section . . .
Differential
Flow Measurement
7.4
Pressure (DP)
Pressure Measurement
7.5
7.6
Liquid Level Measurement
for Vented Tank with Dry
Reference Leg*
Liquid Level Measurement
for Pressurized Tank with
Liquid-Filled Reference Leg*
7.7
Gauge Pressure
(GP)
Pressure or Liquid Level
Measurement**
7.8
7.9
Flush Mount
Pressure or Liquid Level
Measurement
Absolute Pressure Pressure Measurement**
7.10
7.11
(AP)
DP with Remote
Seals
Liquid Level Measurement
*
These applications also apply for flange-mounted liquid level type transmitters that
are usually mounted directly to a flange at the zero level of the tank.
** These applications also apply for GP and AP type transmitters equipped with remote
seals. However, you can only confirm that input pressure correlates with transmitter
output in processes using remote seal connections.
124
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3
Running Analog Output Check
Background
You can put the transmitter into a constant-current source mode to
checkout other instruments in the loop such as recorders, controllers,
and positioners. Using the SFC, you can tell the transmitter to change its
output to any value between 0 (4mA) and 100 (20mA) percent and
maintain that output. This makes it easy to verify loop operation through
the accurate simulation of transmitter output signals before bringing the
loop on line. Note that the constant-current source mode is also referred
to as the output mode.
The transmitter does not measure the input or update the output while it
is in the constant-current source mode.
ATTENTION
Procedure
The procedure in Table 38 outlines the steps for using a transmitter in its
output mode and clearing the output mode.
Table 38
Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source Mode
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where meter connections in a typical
you can also view receiver instrument in analog loop with a differential
See Figure 38 for sample SFC and
loop. If you want to verify loop
calibration, connect a precision
milliammeter or a voltmeter across a 250
ohm resistor in loop to compare
readings.
pressure type transmitter.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
2
3
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
K
I
N
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
Ø 1
3
1
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Display shows current transmitter
output level and it will update every
six seconds. Be sure to time your
next key press with an updated
display.
4
5
L
I
N
D
P
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
1
S
F C
W O R
1
K
N G .
.
.
O U
O U
T
P
3
P
T
3
0
0
1
1
2
.
4
%
SW VER
Key in 30% for desired output signal
level of 8.8 mA (2.2V).
T
P
3
1
P
T
3
3
1
1
X
3
_
%
Z
0
O U
T
P
3
1
P
T
0
1
Ø _
%
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3
Running Analog Output Check, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 38
Step
6
Using Transmitter in Constant-Current Source Mode, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
Output signal is set at 30% (8.8
mA/2.2 V). A “#” character appears
on right side of display to remind
you that transmitter is in its output
mode.
O U
T
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1 #
1 #
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
O U
P
3
1
P
T
3
0
1
Ø . Ø Ø
%
Check that receiving device indication is If indication is inaccurate, check
at its 30% point. If applicable, check that calibration of receiving device.
milliammeter reading is 8.8 mA or
voltmeter reading is 2.2 V across 250
ohm resistor.
7
8
Repeat Steps 5 and 6 to check
Use transmitter output as a
indications at these output percentages. calibration input source for
instruments in loop.
If output is … Then meter
reads…
0%
4.0mA/1.0V
8.0mA/2V
12.0mA/3V
13.6mA/3.4V
16.8mA/4.2V
20.0mA/5.0V
25%
50%
60%
80%
100%
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Exit constant-current source mode.
Check that # character disappears
from right side of display since
transmitter is no longer in output
mode.
9
O U
T
P
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1 #
1 #
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
O U
T
1
1
P
T
3
0
1
Ø Ø .
Ø
%
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1 #
CLR
(NO)
S
F C
W O R
K
.
N G .
.
.
L
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
0
1
1
R
A D Y .
Continued on next page
126
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.3
Running Analog Output Check, Continued
Procedure, continued
Figure 38
Typical SFC and Meter Connections for Constant-Current Source Mode.
Voltmeter
Field
Terminals
Precision
Milliammeter
+
250
Power
Supply
Ω
Red +
-
+
-
LP
-
Black -
HP
Receiver
+
SFC
Differential Pressure
Type Transmitter
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4
Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 39 outlines the steps for starting up a differential
pressure (DP) type transmitter in a flow measurement application. Refer
to Figure 39 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for
typical SFC and meter connections.
Figure 39
Typical Piping Arrangement for Flow Measurement with DP Type Transmitter
LP Blockoff
LP
HP
Plug G
Plug F
HP Blockoff
Valve B
Valve A
Valve C
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
For the procedure in Table 39, we are assuming that all the valves on the
three-valve manifold and the block-off valves were closed at
installation.
ATTENTION
Table 39
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where
you can also view receiver instrument in
loop. If you want to verify transmitter
output, connect a precision milliammeter
or voltmeter in loop to compare
readings.
See Figure 38 for sample SFC and
meter connections in a typical
analog loop with a differential
pressure type transmitter.
Open equalizer valve C.
See Figure 39 for sample piping
arrangement.
2
Continued on next page
128
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4
Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 39
Step
3
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Open valves A and HP block-off to make Allow system to stabilize at full static
differential pressure zero (0) by applying pressure - zero differential.
same pressure to both sides of meter
body.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
4
5
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
P S
S
E
K
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
I
N
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
I
N
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
3
Ø 1
1
Initiate shift key selection.
6
L
D
S
P
H
T
F
A
T
G
–
N O .
^
SHIFT
I
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
I
N
P U T
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
Read applied input pressure.
Reading is updated every six
seconds.
S
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
I
N
.
P U T
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
9
Ø
3
5
1
1
H
T
2
O _
3
9
F
"
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display.
7
8
O U
T
P
P
I
3
Ø 1
1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
Read 0% output on display for
corresponding zero input pressure.
For analog transmission, check that
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)
output.
O U
T
P
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
Ø .
Ø
%
If SFC and
Then…
milliammeter
readings…
are exactly
zero (4mA)
go to Step 11.
are not exactly go to Step 9.
zero (4mA)
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.4
Flow Measurement with DP Transmitter, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 39
Step
9
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Flow Measurement With SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Initiate shift key selection.
O U
T
P
1
P
F
T
3
Ø 1
1
^
SHIFT
S
H
I
T –
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Read applied input pressure.
I
N
P U T
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
I
N
.
P U T
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
9
Ø
3
5
1
1
H
2
O _
3
9
F
"
RESET
I
N
P U T
P
N
T
3
T
Ø 1
?
1
Prompt asks if the applied input
pressure equals zero input. If it is
zero input, go to next keystroke. If it
is not, press [CLR] key to exit
function and try again.
K
Z E
R
O
I
P U
COR-
RECT
NON-VOL
I
N
P U T
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
1
1
Zero input is set equal to applied
input pressure.
ENTER
(Yes)
S
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
I
I
N
P U T
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
I
N
P
U T
Z E
R
2
O E D
N
.
P U T
Ø Ø Ø 4
1
2
P
T
3
Ø 1
H
O _
3
9 F
"
Repeat Steps 6 to 8.
Close equalizer valve C.
10
11
12
Open valve B and LP block-off valve to
begin measuring process differential
pressure.
Take SFC and milliammeter readings to
check that output signal does
13
correspond to applied input pressure. If
readings don’t correspond, check that
transmitter has been installed correctly.
If applicable, blow down piping to be
sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check SFC and milliammeter readings
again. If readings are still not correct,
verify transmitter’s configuration data
and change its range setting if needed.
Remove SFC and milliammeter from
loop.
14
130
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.5
Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 40outlines the steps for starting up a differential
pressure (DP) type transmitter in a pressure measurement application.
Refer to Figure 40 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure
38 for typical SFC and meter connections.
Figure 40
Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with DP Type Transmitter.
Valve D
Plug C
Valve A
H
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
HP side
HP Vent
LP side
LP Vent
Table 40
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where
you can also view receiver instrument in
loop. If you want to verify transmitter
output, connect a precision milliammeter
or voltmeter in loop to compare
readings.
See Figure 38 for sample SFC and
meter connections in a typical
analog loop with a differential
pressure type transmitter.
Close valve D.
See Figure 40 for sample piping
arrangement.
2
3
Open plug C and valve A to apply head Allow system to stabilize at head
pressure H to meter body. Then, open
LP vent.
pressure.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.5
Pressure Measurement with DP Transmitter, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 40
Step
4
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
K
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
5
6
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
I
N
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
3
Ø 1
1
Read present LRV setting.
E
LRV
0%
L
R
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Ø . Ø Ø Ø Ø
P S
I
Prompt asks if you want to set LRV
to applied pressure.
G
L
L
R
V
V
1
P
L
T
3
?
Ø 1
Ø 1
1
1
SET
S
E T
R
V
I
NON-VOL
LRV is set to applied head pressure.
R
1
1
3
P
T
3
.
8
1
5
P S
ENTER
(Yes)
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display.
7
O U
T
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
Read 0% output on display for
corresponding zero line pressure
plus head pressure H. For analog
transmission, check that
O U
P
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Ø
.
Ø Ø Ø
%
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)
output.
Close plug C
8
9
Open valve D to begin measuring
process line pressure.
Take SFC and milliammeter readings to
check that output signal does
10
correspond to applied line pressure. If
readings don’t correspond, check that
transmitter has been installed correctly.
If applicable, blow down piping to be
sure no foreign matter is entrapped in it.
Check SFC and milliammeter readings
again. If readings are still not correct,
verify transmitter’s configuration data
and change its range setting if needed.
Remove SFC and milliammeter from
loop.
11
132
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.6
Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank
Procedure
The procedure in Table 41 outlines the steps for starting up a differential
pressure (DP) type transmitter in a liquid level measurement application
for a vented tank with a dry reference leg. Refer to Figure 41 for the
piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and
meter connections.
Figure 41
Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter and Vented Tank
Valve A
Plug C
To HP connection
on meter body
Tap location at
H
the minimum level
to be measured
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
LP Vent
For the procedure in Table 41, we are assuming that the tank is empty
and the piping arrangement includes a block-off valve.
ATTENTION
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.6
Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 41
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where
you can also view receiver instrument in
loop. If you want to verify transmitter
output, connect a precision milliammeter
or voltmeter in loop to compare
readings.
See Figure 38 for sample SFC and
meter connections in a typical
analog loop with a differential
pressure type transmitter.
Close block-off valve A.
See Figure 41 for sample piping
arrangement.
2
3
4
Open plug C.
Allow system to stabilize at head
pressure.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
K
C
U
N
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
5
6
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
I
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
3
Ø 1
1
E
LRV
0%
Read present LRV setting.
L
R
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
_
Ø . Ø Ø Ø Ø
H
2
O
3
9
F
F
"
Prompt asks if you want to set LRV
to applied pressure.
G
L
L
R
V
1
P
L
T
3
?
Ø 1
1
SET
S
E T
R
V
2
NON-VOL
R
1
V
1
6
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
LRV is set to applied head pressure.
_
Ø
.
2
4
H
O
3
9
ENTER
(Yes)
"
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display.
7
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
Read 0% output on display for
corresponding empty tank pressure
plus head pressure H. For analog
transmission, check that
O U
T
P
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Ø
.
Ø Ø Ø
%
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)
output.
Close plug C
8
Continued on next page
134
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.6
Liquid Level Measurement - Vented Tank, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 38
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Vented Tank,
Continued
Step
9
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
ATTENTION
Open valve A to begin measuring tank
pressure. Leave LP side vented to
atmosphere.
If the URV was
calculated on the approximate
density of the liquid and/or tank
height, the exact URV can be set by
filling the tank to the desired full
scale level and then setting the URV
through the SFC. See section 6.7 in
this manual for details.
Take SFC and milliammeter readings to
check that output signal does
10
correspond to applied tank level
pressure. If readings don’t correspond,
check that transmitter has been installed
correctly. If applicable, blow down piping
to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped
in it. Check SFC and milliammeter
readings again. If readings are still not
correct, verify transmitter’s configuration
data and change its range setting if
needed.
Remove SFC and milliammeter from
loop.
11
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.7
Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank
Procedure
The procedure in Table 42 outlines the steps for starting up a differential
pressure (DP) type transmitter in a liquid level measurement application
for a pressurized tank with a liquid-filled (wet) reference leg. Refer to
Figure 42 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure 38 for
typical SFC and meter connections.
Figure 42
Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter and Pressurized Tank
Plug D
Valve B
Plug C at
zero level
Valve A
H
1
Tap location at the
minimum level to be
measured
h
Differential
Pressure
Transmitter
HP side of transmitter
For the procedure in Table 42, we are assuming that:
• The tank is empty and the reference leg is filled.
• The high pressure (HP) side of the transmitter is connected to the
wet reference leg. Note that the transmitter will work if the HP side
is connected to the bottom of the tank, but not within the guaranteed
accuracy specifications.
ATTENTION
• The transmitter is mounted below the zero level of the tank, so “h” is
greater than zero. If h equals zero, plug C is eliminated from the
piping and the LP vent is opened instead.
Continued on next page
136
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.7
Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 42
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where
you can also view receiver instrument in
loop. If you want to verify transmitter
output, connect a precision milliammeter
or voltmeter in loop to compare
readings.
See Figure 38 for sample SFC and
meter connections in a typical
analog loop with a differential
pressure type transmitter.
Close block-off valves A and B.
See Figure 42 for sample piping
arrangement.
2
3
4
Open plugs C and D.
Allow system to stabilize at head
pressure.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
K
C
U
N
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
5
6
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
I
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
3
Ø 1
1
E
LRV
0%
Read present LRV setting.
L
R
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
_
Ø . Ø Ø Ø Ø
H
2
O
3
9
F
F
"
Prompt asks if you want to set LRV
to applied pressure.
G
L
L
R
V
1
P
L
T
3
?
Ø 1
1
SET
S
E T
R
V
2
NON-VOL
R
1
V
1
.
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
LRV is set to applied head pressure
H1 times density of liquid in
reference leg.
_
Ø
5
3
2
H
O
3
9
ENTER
(Yes)
"
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display.
7
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
Read 0% output on display for
O U
T
P
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Ø
.
Ø Ø Ø
%
corresponding empty tank pressure
plus head pressure H1. For analog
transmission, check that
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)
output.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.7
Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 42
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank,
continued
Step
8
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
If you …
Then…
can not fill tank go to Step 9.
can fill tank to
desired full-
scale level
go to Step 10.
Key in URV that is equal to full tank
pressure. See section 6.7 in this manual
for details on keying in a range value.
Go to Step 14.
9
Close plugs C and D.
10
11
Open valves A and B. Fill tank to desired
full scale level.
F
Read present URV setting.
12
U
U
U
R
5
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
URV
100%
_
Ø . Ø Ø Ø
H
2
V
2
O
3
9 F
"
G
R
R
V
1
P
T
3
?
Ø 1
1
Prompt asks if you want to set URV
to applied pressure.
SET
S
E T
U R
NON-VOL
V
1
3
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
URV is set to full tank pressure.
_
5
.
2
Ø
Ø
K
H
O
3
9 F
"
ENTER
(Yes)
INPUT
J
Call up output for display, with full
tank pressure applied.
13
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
1
S
F C
W O R
N G .
.
.
OUT-
PUT
.
O U
T
P
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
Read 100% output on display for
corresponding full tank pressure.
For analog transmission, check that
milliammeter reading is 20 mA
(100%) output.
1
Ø Ø . Ø Ø
%
Continued on next page
138
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.7
Liquid Level Measurement - Pressurized Tank, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 42
Starting Up DP Transmitter for Liquid Level Measurement in Pressurized Tank,
continued
Step
14
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
ATTENTION
Take SFC and milliammeter readings to
check that output signal does
Ranging the
transmitter in this way makes it
reverse acting.
correspond to empty and full tank
pressures. If readings don’t correspond,
check that transmitter has been installed
correctly. If applicable, blow down piping
to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped
in it. Check SFC and milliammeter
readings again. If readings are still not
correct, verify transmitter’s configuration
data and change its range setting if
needed.
Remove SFC and milliammeter from
loop.
15
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.8
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP
Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge
pressure (GP) type transmitter in a pressure or liquid level measurement
application. Refer to Figures 43 and 44 for the piping arrangement
identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections.
Figure 43
Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with GP Type Transmitter
Pipe
Plug
Block-off
valve no.1
Union
Gauge
Pressure
Transmitter
Block-off
valve no.2
Process
Tee connector
Figure 44
Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with GP Type
Transmitter
To Process Head
connection on
meter body
Block-off
valve
Gauge
Pressure
Transmitter
Tap location at the minimum
level to be measured
Continued on next page
140
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.8
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP
Transmitter, Continued
Procedure, continued
For the procedure in Table 43, we are assuming that piping arrangement
includes a block-off valve and a Tee-connector. If your piping does not
include a Tee-connector, you can only verify that the input and output
readings correlate.
ATTENTION
Table 43
Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where
you can also view receiver instrument in
loop. If you want to verify transmitter
output, connect a precision milliammeter
or voltmeter in loop to compare
readings.
See Figure 38 for sample SFC and
meter connections in a typical
analog loop with a differential
pressure type transmitter.
2
3
4
Close block-off valve.
See Figure 43 or 44 for sample
piping arrangement.
Remove plug from Tee-connector to
vent it to atmosphere, if applicable.
Allow system to stabilize at static
pressure.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
5
6
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
K
I
N
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
3
Ø 1
1
Initiate shift key selection.
O U
T
P
1
P
F
T
3
Ø 1
1
^
SHIFT
S
H
I
T –
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
I
N
P U T
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
1
Read applied input pressure which
should be zero.
S
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
I
N
.
P U T
1
P
P
T
3
Ø 1
Ø Ø Ø 4
2
S
I
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display.
7
O U
T
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
Read 0% output on display for
corresponding input pressure. For
analog transmission, check that
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)
output.
O U
P
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Ø
.
Ø Ø Ø
%
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.8
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP
Transmitter, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 43
Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC,
continued
Step
8
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
If SFC and
Then…
milliammeter
readings…
are zero (4mA) go to Step 11.
are not zero
(4mA) and Tee
-connector is
level with
go to Step 9.
transmitter
are not zero
(4mA) and Tee
-connector is
above
go to Step 10.
transmitter
Initiate shift key selection.
9
O U
T
P
1
P
F
T
3
3
Ø 1
Ø 1
1
1
^
SHIFT
S
H
1
I
T –
INPUT
I
N
P U T
P
I
T
J
Read applied input pressure.
S
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
OUT-
PUT
I
N
.
P U T
1
P
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
8
3
5
4
7
S
I
Prompt asks if the applied input
pressure equals zero input. If it is
zero input, go to next keystroke. If it
is not, press [CLR] key to exit
function and try again.
I
N
P U T
1
P
N
T
3
T
Ø 1
?
1
RESET
Z E
R
O
I
P U
K
COR-
RECT
NON-VOL
Zero input is set equal to applied
input pressure. Go to Step 11.
I
N
P U T
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
I
N
P U T
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
I
N
P
U T
Z E
R
I
O E D
I
N
.
P U T
Ø Ø Ø 2
1
9
P
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
S
Continued on next page
142
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.8
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with GP
Transmitter, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 43
Starting Up GP Transmitter for Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement With SFC,
continued
Step
10
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
E
Read present LRV setting.
L
R
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
LRV
0%
Ø . Ø Ø Ø Ø
P S
I
Prompt asks if you want to set LRV
to applied pressure.
G
L
L
R
V
1
P
L
T
3
?
Ø 1
Ø 1
1
1
SET
S
E T
R
V
I
NON-VOL
R
1
V
1
P
T
3
LRV is set to applied pressure.
Ø . Ø Ø 5
P S
ENTER
(Yes)
Close Tee-connector and slowly open
block-off valve to apply process
pressure to transmitter.
11
12
Take SFC and milliammeter readings to
check that output signal does
correspond to zero and full-scale
pressures. If readings don’t correspond,
check that transmitter has been installed
correctly. If applicable, blow down piping
to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped
in it. Check SFC and milliammeter
readings again. If readings are still not
correct, verify transmitter’s configuration
data and change its range setting if
needed.
Remove SFC and milliammeter from
loop.
13
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.9
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement with Flush
Mount Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 43 outlines the steps for starting up a gauge
pressure (GP) type transmitter in a pressure or liquid level measurement
application. Refer to Figures 45 and 46 for the flush mount transmitter
arrangement and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter connections.
For the procedure in Table 43, we are assuming that piping arrangement
includes a block-off valve and a Tee-connector. If your piping does not
include a Tee-connector, you can only verify that the input and output
readings correlate.
ATTENTION
Figure 45
Typical Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter
Flush Mount
Transmitter
1" Pipe Mount -
316 SS Weld Nipple
(standard option)
Process
Figure 46
Typical Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with Flush Mount Transmitter
Maximum Level
Flush Mount
Transmitter
Minimum Level
144
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.10
Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter
Procedure
The procedure in Table 44 outlines the steps for starting up an absolute
pressure (AP) type transmitter in a pressure measurement application.
Refer to Figure 47 for the piping arrangement identification and Figure
38 for typical SFC and meter connections.
Figure 47
Typical Piping Arrangement for Pressure Measurement with AP Type Transmitter.
Pipe
Plug
Shut-off
valve no.1
Union
Absolute
Pressure
Transmitter
Shut-off
valve no.2
Tee connector
Process
For additional overrrange protection, use
Sprague engineering type gauge saver or
Fairchild model 95 gauge guard (style 1)
For AP transmitters, you can only verify that the input and output
readings correlate.
ATTENTION
Table 44
Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where
you can also view receiver instrument in
loop. If you want to verify transmitter
output, connect a precision milliammeter
or voltmeter in loop to compare
readings.
See Figure 38 for sample SFC and
meter connections in a typical
analog loop with a differential
pressure type transmitter.
Set process pressure to zero level
Allow system to stabilize at zero
pressure.
2
3
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.10
Pressure Measurement with AP Transmitter, Continued
Procedure,
continued
Table 44
Step
4
Starting Up AP Transmitter for Pressure Measurement With SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
K
I
N
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
3
Ø 1
1
Initiate shift key selection.
5
6
O U
T
P
1
P
F
T
3
3
Ø 1
1
^
SHIFT
S
H
I
T –
INPUT
J
Read applied input pressure which
should be zero.
I
N
P U T
1
P
I
T
Ø 1
1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
OUT-
PUT
I
N
.
P U T
1
P
P
T
3
Ø 1
Ø Ø Ø 4
2
S
I
INPUT
J
Call up output for display.
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
OUT-
PUT
Read 0% output on display for
corresponding input pressure. For
analog transmission, check that
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)
output.
O U
T
P
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Ø
.
Ø Ø Ø
%
Take SFC and milliammeter readings to
check that output signal does
7
correspond to zero and full-scale
pressures. If readings don’t correspond,
check that transmitter has been installed
correctly. If applicable, blow down piping
to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped
in it. Check SFC and milliammeter
readings again. If readings are still not
correct, verify transmitter’s configuration
data and change its range setting if
needed.
Remove SFC and milliammeter from
loop.
8
146
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.11
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with
Remote Seals
Procedure
The procedure in Table 45 outlines the steps for starting up a differential
pressure (DP) type transmitter with remote diaphragm seals in a liquid
level measurement application. Refer to Figure 48 for the piping
arrangement identification and Figure 38 for typical SFC and meter
connections.
Figure 48
Typical Piping Arrangement for Liquid Level Measurement with DP Type
Transmitter with Remote Seals
LP Side
Full Level
Differential
Pressure
H2
Fixed
Variable
Head H1
Transmitter with
remote seals
Ref. Leg
Zero Level (empty)
HP Side
For the procedure in Table 45, we are assuming that the tank is empty
and the remote seal flanges are installed at their final positions. The
transmitter is a model STR93D or STR12D with a compound
characterized meter body. The DP transmitter has its high pressure (HP)
side connected to the tank’s lower flange and low pressure (LP) side
connected to the upper flange. (Note that connections would be reversed
for a model STR13D transmitter or a model STR12D transmitter
without a compound characterized meter body.)
ATTENTION
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.11
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with
Remote Seals, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 45
Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with
SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. If possible, locate SFC where
you can also view receiver instrument in
loop. If you want to verify transmitter
output, connect a precision milliammeter
or voltmeter in loop to compare
readings.
See Figure 38 for sample SFC and
meter connections in a typical
analog loop with a differential
pressure type transmitter.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
2
3
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
K
I
N
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
Ø 1
3
1
See Figure 48 for sample piping
arrangement.
4
5
If you …
can not empty go to Step 5.
tank
Then…
can empty tank go to Step 6.
You can use this formula to
calculate LRV in inH2O.
Key in LRV that is equal to empty tank
pressure. See section 6.7 in this manual
for details on keying in a range value.
Go to Step 8.
LRV = H2 x Sf x –1
H2 = Height of fixed reference leg
in inches.
Sf = Specific gravity of remote
seal fill fluid.
–1 = Required for LRV
calculation
since pressure is on
low side of meter body.
Example: If H2 equaled 12 feet and
the fill fluid was silicone oil,
substituting into the formula yields.
LRV = 12 ft x 12 in x 0.94 x –1
LRV = –135.36 inH2O
ATTENTION
The specific gravity
of silicone oil fill fluid is 0.94 and
florolube fill fluid is 1.84.
Continued on next page
148
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.11
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with
Remote Seals, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 45
Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with
SFC, continued
Step
6
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Read present LRV setting.
E
L
L
R
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
LRV
0%
_
Ø . Ø Ø Ø Ø
H
2
O
3
9
F
"
Prompt asks if you want to set LRV
to applied pressure.
G
R
V
1
P
L
T
3
?
Ø 1
1
SET
S
E T
R
V
2
LRV is set to fixed reference leg
pressure H2 times specific gravity of
remote seal fill fluid and –1 for
NON-VOL
L
R
1
V
3
1
.
P T
3
Ø
_
1
1
–
5
3
6
H
O
3
9
F
ENTER
(Yes)
"
pressure on low side of meter body.
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display.
7
O U
T
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
1
K
N G .
.
.
Read 0% output on display for
corresponding empty tank pressure
plus reference pressure H2. For
analog transmission, check that
milliammeter reading is 4 mA (0%)
output.
O U
P
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Ø
.
Ø Ø Ø
%
8
9
If you …
can not fill tank go to Step 9.
can fill tank go to Step 10.
Then…
You can use these formulas to
calculate URV in inH2O.
Span = H1 x SL
Key in URV that is equal to full tank
pressure. See section 6.7 in this manual
for details on keying in a range value.
Go to Step 12.
H1 = Height of variable head
in inches.
SL = Specific gravity of
measured liquid.
URV = Span + LRV
Example: If H1 equaled 10 feet, the
measured liquid was water, and the
LRV equaled –135.36 inH2O;
substituting into the formulas yields.
Span = 10 ft x 12 in x 1.00
Span = 120 inH2O
URV = 120 inH2O + –135.36 inH2O
URV = –15.36 inH2O
ATTENTION
The specific gravity
of water at 60 °F (15.6 °C) is 1.00.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.11
Liquid Level Measurement with DP Transmitter with
Remote Seals, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 45
Starting Up DP Transmitter with Remote Seals for Liquid Level Measurement with
SFC, continued
Step
10
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
F
Read present URV setting.
U
U
R
5
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
URV
100%
_
Ø . Ø Ø Ø
H
2
V
2
O
3
9 F
"
G
R
V
1
P
T
3
?
Ø 1
1
Prompt asks if you want to set URV
to applied pressure.
SET
S
E T
U R
NON-VOL
U
–
R
1
V
5
1
3
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
URV is set to full tank pressure.
_
.
6
Ø
H
O
3
9
F
"
ENTER
(Yes)
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display, with full
tank pressure applied.
11
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
Ø 1
1
S
F C
W O R
1
K
N G .
.
.
.
O U
T
P
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Read 100% output on display for
corresponding full tank pressure.
For analog transmission, check that
milliammeter reading is 20 mA
(100%) output.
1
Ø Ø . Ø Ø
%
Take SFC and milliammeter readings to
check that output signal does
12
correspond to empty and full tank
pressures. If readings don’t correspond,
check that transmitter has been installed
correctly. If applicable, blow down piping
to be sure no foreign matter is entrapped
in it. Check SFC and milliammeter
readings again. If readings are still not
correct, verify transmitter’s configuration
data and change its range setting if
needed.
Remove SFC and milliammeter from
loop.
13
150
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8 —Operation
8.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics:
Section
Topic
See Page
8.1 Introduction ................................................................................151
8.2 Accessing Operation Data .........................................................152
8.3 Changing Default Failsafe Direction...........................................155
8.4 Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area...............................................157
8.5 Saving and Restoring a Database..............................................159
8.6 Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display .......................................163
About this section
This section identifies how to access typical data associated with the
operation of an ST 3000 transmitter. It also includes procedures for:
• Changing the default failsafe direction,
• Writing data in the scratch pad area,
• Saving and Restoring a database, and
• Monitoring optional Local Smart Meter display.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2
Accessing Operation Data
Summary
You can access this data relevant to the operation of the transmitter
using an SFC.
• Input
• Output
• Span
• Upper Range Limit
• Status
• Failsafe Output Direction
• Sensor Temperature
• Scratch Pad Messages
• PROM Serial Number
Procedure
Table 46 summarizes the keystrokes required to access given operation
data from the transmitter using an SFC. These keystrokes assume that
SFC communications have been established with the transmitter by
pressing the [ID] key. The values shown in displays are for example
purposes only.
Table 46
Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access
IF you want to view…
THEN use these keystrokes…
the present input pressure,
which is updated every six
seconds
^
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
P
F
T
T
3
0
1
1
1
SHIFT
I
–
INPUT
J
I
N
P U T
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
OUT-
PUT
S
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
I
N
1
P U T
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
3
2
.
7
Ø
H
T
2
O _
3
9 F
"
INPUT
the present transmitter
J
output in percent, which is
updated every six seconds
O U
T
P
1
P
I
3
0
1
1
1
OUT-
PUT
S
F C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
O U
T
6
P
5
1
P
T
3
0
1
.
7
4
%
Continued on next page
152
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2
Accessing Operation Data, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 46
Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access,
continued
IF you want to view…
THEN use these keystrokes…
URL
the span, which is the URV
minus the LRV
Y
S
P
2
A
N
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
SPAN
_
Ø
Ø .
Ø
Ø
H
2
–
O
3
9 F
"
the Upper Range Limit of
the transmitter
^
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
P
F
T
T
3
0
1
1
SHIFT
I
URL
Y
U
R
4
L
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
SPAN
_
Ø Ø . Ø Ø
H
2
O
3
9 F
"
F/S DIR
U
the status of transmitter
operation at the present
time
S
S
T
A
T U
S
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
1
STAT
F C
W O R
K
C
.
N G .
.
.
S
S
T
T
A
T U
S
P
H
T
3
0
1
A
T
U S
E C K = O K
L
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
3
0
0
1
1
1
1
R
A D Y .
the present failsafe output
direction for the transmitter
^
L
I
N
D
S
P
P
F
T
T
SHIFT
H
I
–
F/S DIR
U
F
S
/
S
D
I
R
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
STAT
ATTENTION
F C
W O R
K
U
N G .
.
.
You can
change the default failsafe
direction from upscale to
downscale. See Changing
default failsafe direction in
this section.
F
F
/
S
D
F
I
R
P
T
3
0
1
1
/
S
A
A
E
P S
C
A L
E
OR
F
F
/
S
S
D
F
I
R
P
T
3
0
1
1
/
E
D
O W N S C A L E
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2
Accessing Operation Data, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 46
Summary of Keystrokes for Operation Data Access,
continued
IF you want to view…
THEN use these keystrokes…
B
the present temperature
(±5 °C) measured by
circuitry in the transmitter’s
sensor
S T
C
O N
F
I
G
CONF
C
O N F O
R
M
I
T
Y ?
H
S
t
T
C
O
C
N F
I
G
i
NEXT
g
M
E
e
e
r
o
n
f
?
ATTENTION
You can
change the temperature
engineering units to °F, °R
or °K by pressing the [UNITS]
key to select and then the
[CONF] key to return to the
temperature display.
H
S T
S O
C
O N
T E
F
I
G
NEXT
S
N
R
M
P ?
NON-VOL
S T
C
O N
F
I
G
.
ENTER
(Yes)
S
S
F C
W O R
K
I
N G
.
.
E
1
N
S O R
T
E
M
P
.
6
.
2
9
6
Þ C
the present message in the
scratch pad area of memory
^
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
P
T
T
3
0
0
1
1
SHIFT
I
F
–
SCR PAD
S
S
C
R
P A
D
P T
3
.
1
.
1
F C
W O R
K
I
N G
.
S
C
C
R
A
I
T C
B
H
P
A
D
1
A L
O N
3
/
2
2
/
9 3
H
S
B
C
Y
R
A
T C
H
N
P
2
A
n
D
d
2
NEXT
J O H
S H F T
B
the PROM serial number
S T
C
O N
F
I
G
CONF
C
O N F O
R
M
I
T
Y ?
H
S
t
T
C
O
C
N F
I
G
i
NEXT
g
M
E
e
e
r
o
n
f
?
H
S T
S O
C
O N
T E
F
I
G
NEXT
S
S
N
R
1
M
P ?
H
S T
#
C
Ø
O N
F
5
I
G
NEXT
E
R
7
7
1
2 Ø Ø
154
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.3
Changing Default Failsafe Direction
Background
Transmitters are shipped with a default failsafe direction of upscale.
This means that the transmitter’s output will be driven upscale
(maximum output) when the transmitter detects a critical status.
You can change the direction from upscale to downscale (minimum
output) by cutting jumper W1 on the Printed Wiring Assembly (PWA)
Analog and DE mode
differences
If your transmitter is operating in the analog mode, an upscale failsafe
action will drive the transmitter’s output to greater than 21 mA or a
downscale action will drive its output to less than 3.8 mA.
If your transmitter is operating in the DE mode, an upscale failsafe
action will cause the transmitter to generate a “+ infinity” digital signal,
or a downscale failsafe action will cause it to generate a “– infinity”
digital signal. The STIMV IOP module interprets either signal as “not a
number” and initiates its own configured failsafe action for the control
system. The STDC card initiates the failsafe mode configured through
the transmitter when either signal is generated.
The failsafe direction display that you can access through the SFC only
shows the state of the failsafe jumper in the transmitter as it correlates to
analog transmitter operation. The failsafe action of the digital control
system may be configured to operate differently than indicated by the
state of the jumper in the transmitter.
ATTENTION
Procedure
The procedure in Table 47 outlines the steps for cutting the failsafe
direction jumper on the transmitter’s PWA. Figure 49 shows the
location of the failsafe direction jumper on the PWA of, Release 300
transmitters.
The nature of the integrated circuitry used in the transmitter’s PWA
makes it susceptible to damage by stray static discharges when it is
removed from the transmitter. Follow these tips to minimize chances of
static electricity damage when handling the PWA.
• Never touch terminals, connectors, component leads, or circuits when
handling the PWA.
• When removing or installing the PWA, hold it by its edges or bracket
section only. If you must touch the PWA circuits, be sure you are
grounded by staying in contact with a grounded surface or wearing a
grounded wrist strap.
• As soon as the PWA is removed from the transmitter, put it in an
electrically conductive bag or wrap it in aluminum foil to protect it.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.3
Changing Default Failsafe Direction, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 47
Cutting Failsafe Direction Jumper
Step
1
Action
Turn OFF transmitter power. Loosen end-cap lock and unscrew end
cap from electronics side of transmitter housing.
If applicable, carefully turn Local Smart Meter counterclockwise to
remove it from PWA mounting bracket and unplug cable from
connector on back of meter assembly.
2
Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket and
PWA from housing. Unplug flex tape and power connectors from
component side of PWA, and remove PWA.
With component side of PWA facing you, locate failsafe direction
jumper W1 and cut it in half with small wire cutter such as dykes. See
Figure 48. This changes failsafe action from upscale to downscale.
3
Reverse applicable previous steps to replace PWA.
Turn ON transmitter power.
4
5
Figure 49
Location of Failsafe Direction Jumper on PWA.
Power
Connector
Meter
Connector
Failsafe
Direction
Jumper
156
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.4
Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area
Background
You can enter or edit a message in the scratch pad area of memory
consisting of two groups of 16 characters each through the SFC.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 48 outlines the steps for editing a sample
message in the scratch pad area. This procedure assumes that SFC
communications have been established with the transmitter by pressing
the [ID] key
Table 48
Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
L
I
N
R
D
S
P
H
P
F
T
T
3
0
1
1
^
Initiate shift key selection.
SHIFT
I
–
SCR PAD
S
C
P A
D
P T
3
0
1
1
Call up first group of 16 characters.
S
F C
W O R
K
I
N G
.
.
.
S
C
R
A
I
T C
B
H
P
A
D
1
C
A L
O N
3
/
2
2
/
9 3
H
Call up second group of 16
characters
2
3
S
C
Y
R
A
T C
H
N
P
A
n
D
2
B
J O H
2
d
S H F T
NEXT
M
Move cursor to 6th character “H”.
Cursor moves one character space
to right with each press. Use [←]
key to move cursor one character
space to left with each press. Note
that cursor keys will automatically
toggle between pad 1 and 2 when
moving forward or backward through
message as applicable.
S
C
Y
R
A
T C
H
N
P
A
n
D
2
B
J O H
2
d
S H F T
Enter alpha mode so you can use
SFC keyboard to enter alphabetic
characters.
4
5
S
C
Y
R
A
T C
H
N
P
A
n
D
2
NUM/
B
J O *
2
d
S H F T
ALPHA
E
LRV
0%
Key in “E” and “space” to change
name from JOHN to JOE
S
C
Y
R
R
A
T C
H
*
P
A
n
D
2
B
J O
E
2
d
S H F T
SCR PAD
S
C
Y
A
T C
H
*
P
A
n
D
2
B
J O
E
2
d
S H F T
Exit alpha mode.
6
S
C
Y
R
A
T C
H
_
P
A
n
D
2
NUM/
B
J O
E
2
d
S H F T
ALPHA
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.4
Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 48
Step
7
Writing Data in Scratch Pad Area, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
H
Return to first group of 16
characters.
S
C
R
A
I
T C
B
H
P
A
D
/
1
C
A L
O N
3
2
2
2
/
/
9 3
9 3
NEXT
M
Move cursor to 10th character “3”.
8
9
S
C
R
A
I
T C
B
H
P
A
D
/
1
C
A L
O N
3
2
SEC VAR
Change “3” to “6” to reflect revised
calibration date.
S
C
R
A
I
T C
B
H
P
A
D
/
1
T
6
C
A L
O N
6
2
2
/
9 3
NON-VOL
Save changes in message.
10
S
C
R
P A
D
S
F C
W O R
K
I
N G
.
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
S
C
R
A
I
T C
B
H
P
A
D
1
C
A L
O N
6
/
2
3
2
/
9 3
1
OR
L
I
N
D
P
P
.
T
0
1
CLR
(NO)
Exit scratch pad without saving
changes in message.
R
E
A D Y .
.
158
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.5
Saving and Restoring a Database
Background
If it ever became necessary to replace a damaged transmitter with a
spare, you could save the configuration database from the damaged
transmitter to the HOLD memory in the SFC and then restore the saved
configuration database from the HOLD memory in the spare transmitter.
In fact, you could restore the saved configuration database in any
number of transmitters as long as you change the tag number (ID) in the
restored database.
NOTE: The configuration data for the optional Local Smart Meter is
stored in a memory located on the transmitter’s PWA. If a database
save and restore is done with the SFC, then the meter configuration is
restored along with the transmitter configuration.
Figure 50 shows a graphical summation of the save and restore database
function.
Figure 50
Summary of Save and Restore Database Function.
Saved Configuration Database
Restored Configuration Database
ID
ID
PT 3011
LINEAR
2.0 sec.
PT 3011
LINEAR
2.0 sec.
Output Form
Damping Time
LRV
Output Form
Damping Time
LRV
35.0 psi
35.0 psi
URV
200.0 psi
SINGLE RNG
6-BYTE
URV
200.0 psi
SINGLE RNG
6-BYTE
Output Signal Mode
Message Format
Failsafe Mode
Output Signal Mode
Message Format
Failsafe Mode
Read Only
Read only
Working
Memory
Working
Memory
Hold
Memory
RESTORE
SAVE
SFC
ST 3000
ST 3000
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.5
Saving and Restoring a Database, Continued
Procedure
The procedure in Table 49 outlines the steps for saving a database from
one transmitter and restoring it in another.
Table 49
Saving and Restoring a Database
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring for
transmitter with database to be saved
and turn it on.
Be sure to put analog loop into
manual mode.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
2
3
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
K
I
N
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
Ø 1
3
1
B
4
5
6
7
8
9
S T
O N F O
C
O N
F
I
G
Call up first configuration parameter.
CONF
C
R
M
I
T
Y ?
H
S
t
T
C
C
O
C
N F
I
G
i
Call up next configuration
parameter.
g
M
E
E
A
e
e
r
o
n
f
?
NEXT
H
S T
S O
O N
T E
F
I
G
Call up next configuration
parameter.
NEXT
S
S
S
N
R
V
R
1
M
P ?
H
S T
#
C
Ø
O N
F
5
I
G
Call up next configuration
parameter.
NEXT
7
7
1
2 Ø Ø
H
S T
E
C
E
O N
F
I
G
Call up save/restore function.
NEXT
R
S
T
O R E ?
NON-VOL
S
S
A
A
V
V
E
E
/
R
D
E S
T
A
O R
?
E
Prompt asks if you want to save
database from this transmitter.
A
T
ENTER
(Yes)
NON-VOL
10
S
A
A
R
V
E
E
D
A T
A
S
Prompt asks for confirmation of
database save function.
Y
O U
U
R
E ?
ENTER
(Yes)
Continued on next page
160
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.5
Saving and Restoring a Database, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 49
Step
Saving and Restoring a Database, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
11
S
S
A
V
E
D
A T
A
I
Answer yes to prompt and initiate
database save function.
F C
W O R
K
N G
.
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
S
D
A
V
E
A
D
S
A T
A
E
Database saved to SFC HOLD
memory.
A T
A
V
D
S
S
A
A
V
E
E
/
R
D
E S
T
A
O R
?
E
V
A
T
Disconnect SFC and connect it to loop
wiring for transmitter whose database is
to be restored.
12
Be sure to put analog loop into
manual mode.
ATTENTION
Be sure to leave SFC
power on. The saved database will be
lost if the SFC power is turned off.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
13
14
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
K
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter without a tag
number (ID) whose database is to
be restored.
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
I
N
A
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
N O .
_
B
15
16
17
18
S T
O N F O
C
O N
F
I
G
Call up first configuration parameter.
CONF
C
R
M
I
T
Y ?
H
S
t
T
C
C
O
C
N F
I
G
i
Call up next configuration
parameter.
g
M
E
E
e
e
r
o
n
f
?
NEXT
H
S T
S O
O N
T E
F
I
G
Call up next configuration
parameter.
NEXT
S
S
N
R
R
1
M
P ?
H
S T
#
C
Ø
O N
F
5
I
G
Call up next configuration
parameter.
NEXT
7
7
1
2 Ø Ø
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.5
Saving and Restoring a Database, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 49
Step
Saving and Restoring a Database, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
H
19
S T
E
C
E
O N
F
I
G
Call up save/restore function.
NEXT
S
A
V
R
S
T
O R E ?
NON-VOL
20
21
22
23
S
S
A
A
V
V
E
E
/
R
D
E S
T
A
O R
?
E
Prompt asks if you want to save
database from this transmitter.
A
T
ENTER
(Yes)
H
S
R
A
E
V
S
E
/
R
E S
E
T
O R
E
Call up prompt for restore function. It
asks if you want to restore saved
database in this transmitter.
NEXT
T O R
D
A
T
A ?
NON-VOL
R
A
E
R
S
E
T O R
E
D
S
A
U
T
A
Prompt asks for confirmation of
database restore function.
Y
O U
R
E ?
ENTER
(Yes)
NON-VOL
R
S
E
S
T O R
T O R
E
D
I
A
T
A
Answer yes to prompt and initiate
database restore function.
F C
W O R
K
S
N G
.
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
R
D
E
A
S
T
E
E
D
T
A
T
A
Saved database has been restored
(written) to transmitter’s memory.
A
R
O R E D
S
R
A
E
V
S
E
/
R
E S
E
T
O R
E
T O R
D
A
T
A ?
24
25
S T
C
E
O N
F
I
G
Return to configuration parameter
menu selection.
CLR
(No)
S
L
A
V
E
/
R
D
S
.
T
O R E ?
I
N
E
P
P
.
T
3
0
1
1
Exit configuration and verify that
transmitter’s ID now reflects ID from
restored database. Tag number PT
3011 is used for example purposes
only. Change tag number and other
configuration data as required.
CLR
(No)
R
A D Y .
162
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.6
Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display
Display description
Figure 51 shows a Local Smart Meter display with all its indicators and
segments lit for reference and Table 50 gives a brief description of what
the indications mean.
Figure 51
Display With All Indicators Lit.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
%
100
SPAN
UNITS
SE T
%
-
18.
8
.80
FLOW
OUTPUT MODE
CHECK STATUS
ANALOG
In H
O
ZERO
2
LOWER
VALUE
mmHg
K GPH
GPM PSI
A
KNOWN VALUE
Table 50
Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51
Display Indicator
What It Means When Lit
17-Segment Bargraph
Gives a gross indication of the transmitter’s PV output from 0 to
100%.
Digital Readout
Gives an indication of the transmitter’s PV output in either percent
of span or actual engineering units. The display range is
±19,990,000 and it is automatically ranged to provide the best
precision possible within the limits of the display. A second
decimal place expands the precision of range values within
±19.99 to 1/100th of a unit.
%
Digital readout represents output in percent of span. This is the
default engineering units selection.
FLOW
Transmitter is configured for Square Root output conformity.
OUTPUT MODE
Transmitter is in its output mode and it is not sending a real PV
signal.
CHECK STATUS
Transmitter in DE mode is broadcasting a critical status or
transmitter in Analog mode has an output that is less than –2.0%
or greater than 106%. Use the SFC to check transmitter’s status.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.6
Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display, Continued
Display description,
continued
Table 50
Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 51, continued
Display Indicator
What It Means When Lit
KNOWN VALUE
The Upper Value or Lower Value being displayed has previously
been configured to the value shown.
ANALOG
Transmitter is in its Analog mode. (When indicator is OFF,
transmitter is in its DE mode)
inH2O
K
Inches of Water is selected engineering units for digital readout
Multiplies digital reading by 1,000. Turns on automatically when
reading exceeds 1999.
GPH
GPM
Gallons per hour is selected engineering units for digital readout.
(Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow this
selection.)
Gallons per minute is selected engineering units for digital
readout. (Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow
this selection.)
mmHg
PSI
A
Millimeters of Mercury is selected engineering units for digital
readout.
Pounds per Square Inch is selected engineering units for digital
readout.
Transmitter is absolute pressure type. Digital readout represents
absolute values.
Stick-On Label (not shown)
Selected engineering unit equals one of these units which is
available as a stick-on label from Honeywell drawing number
30756918-001.
Kpa
= Kilopascals
= Megapascals
= Millibar
Mpa
mbar
bar
= Bar
g/cm2
= Grams per Square Centimeter
Kg/cm2 = Kilograms per Square Centimeter
mmH2O = Millimeters of Water
inHg
mH2O
= Inches of Mercury
= Meters of Water
Typical operation
indications
Table 51 summarizes typical Local Smart Meter indications. Note that
other combinations of status messages are possible.
Continued on next page
164
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.6
Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display, Continued
Typical operation
indications, continued
Table 51
Summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications.
Meter Indication
What It Means
Meter Indication
What It Means
No power
applied.
Meter has
detected
transmitter output
that is not-a-
number.
0
0
0
0
%
100
%
100
100
100
- - -
Normal display
for transmitter in
Analog mode
with digital
readout in
inches of water.
Display range is
Over Limit. Upper
value is
19,990,000 and
transmitter output
is over 100%.
0
%
100
2%00
-
OL
ANALOG
In H
O
2
GPM
K
Normal display
for transmitter in
DE mode and
square root
output. Digital
readout is
gallons per
minute with
1000 multiplier.
Transmitter is in
output mode.
Bargraph and
readout show
value that was
entered through
SFC.
0
100
%
%
%
100.
0
9990
FLOW
OUTPUT MODE
K
GPM
Transmitter in
DE mode is in
non-critical
Input pressure
equal to or
greater than
status.
200%. Display
flashes between
200% (or twice
current URV in
EU) and O-L.
Transmitter locks
output at 200%
and will go no
higher regardless
of input.
0
0
%
100
%
100
Displayed value
may not be valid.
If display is “- - -”
instead of a
value,
transmitter is in
critical status.
%
%
200.
0
77.
9
CHECK STATUS
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.6
Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display, Continued
Operation error codes
Table 52 identifies possible meter error codes and what they mean.
Table 52
Possible Smart Meter Error Codes.
If error indication is . . .
Then, it means
You have tried to set local Zero or Span adjustment in a
Series 100 transmitter which does not support this option.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
%
Er
0
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
You have tried to set a pressure type engineering unit for a
transmitter in SQUARE ROOT mode (FLOW) or have tried
to set a flow type engineering unit for a transmitter in
LINEAR mode (pressure). After this error is displayed, the
meter will return to the unit # (EU#) of the Engineering Unit
it was displaying before the set function was invoked. You
may then select another unit or exit in the normal fashion.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
%
E r
1
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
You have tried to select a process variable for the
transmitter using the VAR SEL. button. The Variable Select
button is non-functioning on the ST 3000 R300 transmitter.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
%
E r
2
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
You have tried to set Lower or Upper display limit for
pressure type engineering units (EU1to EUC), or Lower
display limit for flow type engineering units (EUD,EUE) or
CUSTOM unit (EUF) in transmitter configured for SQUARE
ROOT output. Or, you have tried to set upper display limit
for flow or Custom unit in transmitter with SQUARE ROOT
output and URV set to zero (0). In SQUARE ROOT mode,
the transmitter’s URV cannot equal zero. The Lower and
Upper display limits only apply for CUSTOM (EUF) unit in
transmitter configured for LINEAR output. The Upper
display limit also applies for FLOW (EUD,EUE) and
CUSTOM (EUF) units with transmitter in SQUARE ROOT
mode , but the Lower display limit is fixed at zero (0) and
cannot be changed.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
%
E r
3
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Continued on next page
166
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.6
Monitoring Local Smart Meter Display, Continued
Operation error codes,
continued
Table 52
Possible Smart Meter Error Codes, continued.
If error indication is . . .
Then, it means
You have tried to set a span value that is outside
acceptable limits for your transmitter.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
%
E r
4
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
You have tried to invoke a Local Smart Meter set function
with the transmitter’s Write Protect jumper in its Read Only
position. You cannot make changes in the Local Smart
Meter settings when the transmitter’s configuration is write
protected.
VAR
SEL.
UPPER
VALUE
0
100
%
UNITS
SE T
%
E r
5
ANALOG
LOWER
VALUE
Meter/transmitter
interaction
• Cycling transmitter power OFF/ON will have no affect on meter
configuration. The meter digital readout will be in the previously set
engineering units and applicable upper and lower display limits will be
ATTENTION
intact when transmitter power is restored. (See
in
Section 6.8 when setting range values and configuring the meter
display.)
• If you switch the transmitter mode from Analog to DE, the ANALOG
indicator on the meter will go out. If you switch from DE to Analog
mode, the ANALOG indicator will light.
• If you reconfigure the transmitter output conformity from SQUARE
ROOT to LINEAR, the meter’s digital readout will automatically
revert to the default engineering unit of percent and the FLOW
indicator will go out when the change is downloaded to the
transmitter. Likewise, if you reconfigure the transmitter output
conformity from LINEAR to SQUARE ROOT, the meter’s digital
readout will automatically revert to the default engineering unit of
percent and the FLOW indicator will light when the change is
downloaded to the transmitter. In either case, you must reconfigure the
transmitter as outlined in Section 6.11 or 6.12 of this manual.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9 —Maintenance
9.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics
Section
Topic
See Page
9.1 Introduction ................................................................................169
9.2 Preventive Maintenance.............................................................170
9.3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms.............................171
9.4 Replacing PWA..........................................................................175
9.5 Replacing Meter Body................................................................178
About this section
This section provides information about preventive maintenance
routines, cleaning barrier diaphragms, and replacing damaged parts.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2
Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance routines
and schedules
The ST 3000 transmitter itself does not require any specific maintenance
routine at regularly scheduled intervals. However, you should consider
carrying out these typical inspection and maintenance routines on a
schedule that is dictated by the characteristics of the process medium
being measured and whether blow-down facilities or purge systems are
being used.
• Check piping for leaks
• Clear the piping of sediment or other foreign matter
• Clean the transmitter’s pressure chambers including the barrier
diaphragms
170
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.3
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
Background
Depending on the characteristics of the process medium being
measured, sediment or other foreign particles may collect in the process
head cavity/chamber and cause faulty measurement. In addition, the
barrier diaphragm or diaphragms in the transmitter’s meter body may
become coated with a residue from the process medium. The latter is
also true for external diaphragms on flange mount and remote seal type
transmitters.
In most cases, you can readily remove the process head or heads from
the transmitter’s meter body to clean the process head cavity and inspect
the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms. For flange mount and remote seal
diaphragms, you may only need to run a purge line in the tank to rinse
off the face of the diaphragm.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 53 outlines the general steps for inspecting and
cleaning barrier diaphragms. You may have to modify the steps to meet
your particular process or transmitter model requirements.
Table 53
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms
Step
1
Action
Close all valves and isolate transmitter from process. Open vent in
process head to drain fluid from transmitter’s meter body, if required.
ATTENTION
We recommend that you remove the transmitter
from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart.
Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to meter
body. Remove process heads and bolts.
2
Nuts
O-ring
Bolts
Process
head
O-ring
Center
section
Process
head
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.3
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 53
Step
3
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, continued
Action
Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle
brush and suitable solvent.
Inspect barrier diaphragm for any signs of deterioration or corrosion.
Look for possible residue and clean if necessary.
4
NOTE: If diaphragm is dented, has distorted convolutions or radial
wrinkles, performance may be affected. Contact TAC for
assistance.
Replace O-ring.
5
ATTENTION
• We recommend that you install a new O-ring whenever a process
head is removed for cleaning.
• The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with single-head
design has two O-ring grooves. A large one which is 2 in (50.8
mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3 in (33 mm) in
diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high-pressure,
model STG180, GP transmitters, be sure to use a small O-ring in
the smaller/inner groove. On other models of GP and AP
transmitters, use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never
use both O-rings together.
Larger O-ring Smaller O-ring
groove for
lower pressure high pressure
applications applications
groove for
22518
GP/AP Process Head
• For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head
design, see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters
in Step 2.
Continued on next page
172
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.3
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 53
Step
6
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, continued
Action
Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such
as “Neverseize” or equivalent.
Replace process head or heads and bolts. Finger tighten nuts.
7
8
Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown
in Table 48 in sequence shown in following illustration. Tighten head
bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque, and then full torque.
Always tighten head bolts in
sequence shown and in these
stages:
1
4
3
2
1. 1/3 full torque
2. 2/3 full torque
3. Full torque
Return transmitter to service.
CAUTION
9
Do not exceed the overload rating when placing the
transmitter back into service or during cleaning operations. See
Overpressure ratings in Section 3 of this manual.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.3
Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms, Continued
Torque ratings
Table 54 lists process head bolt torque ratings for given transmitter type.
Table 54 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings
Meter Body
Type
Process Head Bolting Type
Bolting Size
Carbon Steel –
B7M Bolting
[“B7” Option]
Stainless Steel NACE 316 Stainless Steel
Standard; no option
specified
[“CR” Option]
Non-NACE [“SS”
Option]
Draft Range
Transmitter
7/16 x 14 UNC 20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft] [15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft] [15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft] [15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]
7/16 x 20 UNF NA
NA
25,8 N-m +/- 1,3 N-m
[19.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]
NA
NA
M12 x 1.75
25,8 N-m +/- 1,3 N-m
NA
NA
[19.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]
63,7 N-m +/- 3,2 N-m
[47.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.4 Lb-Ft]
All Other DP, M12 x 1.75
GP and AP
Transmitters
NA
NA
NA
7/16 x 20 UNF NA
NA
63,7 N-m +/- 3,2 N-m
[47.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.4 Lb-Ft]
56,9 N-m +/- 2,8 N-m
NA
7/16 x 14 UNC 67,8 N-m +/- 3,4 N-m
48,8 N-m +/- 2,4 N-m
56,9 N-m +/- 2,8 N-m
[50.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.5 Lb-Ft] [36.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.8 Lb-Ft] [42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft] [42.0 Lb-Ft +/- 2.1 Lb-Ft]
3/8 x 16 UNC 39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m
[29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft]
NA
NA
NA
39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m
39,3 N-m +/- 2,0 N-m
[29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft] [29 Lb-Ft +/- 1.5 Lb-Ft]
M8 x 1.25
27,1 N-m +/- 1,4 N-m
NA
NA
[20.0 Lb-Ft +/- 1.0 Lb-Ft]
5/16 x 18 UNC NA
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
20,3 N-m +/- 1,0 N-m
[15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft] [15.0 Lb-Ft +/- 0.8 Lb-Ft]
174
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.4
Replacing PWA
About the PWA
Electronics Board
The circuitry in the ST 3000 Release 300 transmitters is of the single
PWA design. The PWA contains connectors for the flex-tape conductor
from the sensor, the loop power wires and a connector for the optional
smart meter cable.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 55 outlines the steps for replacing the PWA.
Table 55
Replacing PWA.
Step
1
Action
Turn OFF transmitter power.
ATTENTION
We recommend that you remove the transmitter
from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart.
Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of
transmitter housing.
2
3
We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling
the PWA, since electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit
components.
•
If equipped with a Local Smart Meter, carefully turn Smart Meter
counterclockwise to remove it from PWA mounting bracket and
unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly.
•
•
Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull mounting bracket
and PWA from housing.
Using the retaining clip, unplug flex tape connector and 2-wire
power connector from PWA, and remove PWA.
PWA and
Mounting Bracket
Flex-Tape Connector
Transmitter
End Caps
Local Smart
Meter
Power
Connector
Meter
Cable
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.4
Replacing PWA, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 55
Step
4
Replacing PWA, continued
Action
If your transmitter…
has Local Smart Meter
Option
Then…
go to Step 5
does not have Local Smart
Meter Option
go to Step 7
Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA (side without cable
connectors). Unplug meter cable from connector on PWA. Remove
screw retainers from other side of mounting screws so you can
remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA. Set PWA aside.
5
Mounting Screws
PWA Connector Side
V
R E
X
Meter cable is installed
between PWA and
mounting bracket.
X
X - X X X X X X X Y X S S A X X X X X X
R
W
J4 Meter
Connector
Mounting
Bracket
Restraining
Clip
Meter Cable
Orient mounting bracket as noted above with meter cable still located
in slot on its right-hand side, install mounting screws through bracket
and replacement PWA, and install retainers to hold screws in place.
Plug meter cable into connector J4 on PWA and be sure cable is still
under restraining clip on front of bracket. Go to Step 9.
6
Continued on next page
176
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.4
Replacing PWA, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 55
Step
7
Replacing PWA, continued
Action
Note orientation of mounting bracket on PWA (side without cable
connectors). Remove screw retainers from other side of mounting
screws so you can remove screws and mounting bracket from PWA.
Set PWA aside.
Mounting Screws
PWA Connector Side
V
R E
X
X X X -
X X X X X X X X S S A Y X X X X X
R
W
Mounting
Bracket
Orient mounting bracket as noted above, install mounting screws
through bracket and replacement PWA, and install retainers to hold
screws in place.
8
9
Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3, as applicable, to install PWA and
bracket to transmitter housing.
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease
such as Dow Corning #33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
ATTENTION
Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper
viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate the meter mounting
orientation in 90 degree increments.
Return transmitter to service and turn ON power.
10
11
If applicable, verify Local Smart Meter configuration data.
Reconfigure selected engineering units and lower and upper display
range values as required. (See Subsections 6.11 and/or 6.12 for
details.)
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.5
Replacing Meter Body
Procedure
You can replace the complete meter body including process heads or
only the meter body on selected DP, GP and AP transmitters by using
the existing process head(s).
Use the procedure in Table 56 to install a meter body only.
Table 56
Replacing Meter Body Only
Step
1
Action
Complete first 3 Steps in Table 55, as applicable, to remove PWA.
Use 4 mm size hex wrench to completely loosen set screw outside
housing.
2
Set Screw
Process Head
Process Head
Meter Body
Carefully turn complete meter body counterclockwise to unscrew it
from electronics housing.
3
4
Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to center
section. Remove process heads and bolts
Continued on next page
178
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.5
Replacing Meter Body, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 56
Step
5
Replacing Meter Body Only, continued
Action
Remove O-ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle
brush and suitable solvent.
Replace O-ring.
6
ATTENTION
The process head for a GP or an AP transmitter with
single-head design has two O-ring grooves. A large one which is 2 in
(50.8 mm) in diameter and a small one which is 1.3 in (33 mm) in
diameter as shown in the following illustration. On high-pressure,
model STG180, GP transmitters, be sure to use a small O-ring in the
smaller/inner groove. On other models of GP and AP transmitters,
use a large O-ring in the larger/outer groove. Never use both O-rings
together.
Larger O-ring Smaller O-ring
groove for
lower pressure high pressure
applications applications
groove for
22518
GP/AP Process Head
•
For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual-head
design, see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters
in Step 8.
Coat threads on process head bolts with anti-seize compound such
as “Neverseize” or equivalent.
7
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.5
Replacing Meter Body, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 56
Step
8
Replacing Meter Body Only, continued
Action
Carefully assemble process head or heads and bolts to new meter
body. Finger tighten nuts.
Typical Series 100 DP Transmitter Meter Body
Nuts
Flex Tape
O-ring
O-ring
Bolts
Process
head
Meter
Body
Process
head
Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown
in Table 48 in sequence shown in following illustration. Tighten head
bolts in stages of 1/3 full torque, 2/3 full torque, and then full torque.
9
Always tighten head bolts in
sequence shown and in these
stages:
1
4
3
2
1. 1/3 full torque
2. 2/3 full torque
3. Full torque
22519
Continued on next page
180
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.5
Replacing Meter Body, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 56
Step
Replacing Meter Body Only, continued
Action
Feed flex tape on new meter body through neck of housing and
screw new meter body into housing until bottom of header portion of
center section is approximately flush with neck of electronics
housing.
10
Tighten outside set screw to be sure it is fully seated in slot in
header. Loosen set screw half turn, rotate housing to desired position
and tighten set screw.
11
12
Reverse actions in Steps 2 and 3 in Table 52, as applicable, to return
PWA and bracket to transmitter housing.
We recommend that you lubricate end-cap O-ring with silicon grease
such as Dow Corning #33 or equivalent before you replace end cap.
ATTENTION
Be sure to orient Local Smart Meter for proper
viewing through end-cap window. You can rotate the meter mounting
orientation in 90 degree increments.
Return transmitter to service and turn ON power.
13
14
Verify transmitter’s configuration data. Restore saved database, if
applicable.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 10 —Calibration
10.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics
Section
Topic
See Page
10.1 Introduction ................................................................................183
10.2 Overview ....................................................................................184
10.3 Calibrating Analog Output Signal...............................................185
10.4 Calibrating Range with SFC.......................................................189
10.5 Resetting Calibration..................................................................192
About this section
This section provides information about calibrating the transmitter’s
analog output and measurement range. It also covers the procedure for
resetting calibration to default values as a quick alternative to
measurement range calibration.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.2
Overview
About calibration
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter does not require recalibration at
periodic intervals to maintain accuracy. If a recalibration is required, we
recommend that you do a bench calibration with the transmitter
removed from the process and located in a controlled environment to get
the best accuracy.
If the transmitter will be operating in the analog mode, you must
calibrate its output signal before you calibrate the transmitter’s
measurement range using the SFC. While it is not required to calibrate
the output signal first for transmitter's operating in the DE mode, you
can do it by using the SFC to read the output in percent.
You can also use the SFC to reset the calibration data to default values,
if it is corrupted, until the transmitter can be recalibrated. See Table 59
in this section for details.
If the transmitter is digitally integrated with our TPS system, you can
initiate range calibration and calibration reset functions through displays
at the Universal Station, GUS and Allen-Bradley PLCs. However, we
still recommend that you do a range calibration using an SFC with the
transmitter removed from service and moved to a controlled
ATTENTION
environment. Details about doing a calibration reset through the
Universal Station are given in the PM/APM Smartline Transmitter
X
Integration Manual PM12-410 which is part of the TDC 3000 system
bookset.
Test Equipment
Required
Depending upon the type of calibration you choose, you may need any
of the following test equipment to accurately calibrate the transmitter:
• Digital Voltmeter or milliammeter with 0.02% accuracy or better
• SFC Smart Field Communicator
• Calibration-standard input source with a 0.02% accuracy
• 250 ohm resistor with 0.01% tolerance or better.
184
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3
Calibrating Analog Output Signal
Background
You can calibrate the transmitter’s analog output circuit at its 0 and
100% levels by using the transmitter in its constant-current source
mode. It is not necessary to remove the transmitter from service.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 57 shows the steps for calibrating the output
signal for a transmitter in the analog mode. Note that the procedure is
similar for a transmitter in the DE mode, but the SFC must be used to
read the output in percent in place of the milliammeter or voltmeter
readings.
Table 57
Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on. Connect a precision
milliammeter or voltmeter ( 0.02%
accuracy or better) in loop to check
readings.
See Figure 38 for sample test
equipment hookup.
ATTENTION
Be sure the
accuracy of the resistor is 0.01% or
better for current measurements
made by voltage drop.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
2
3
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
K
C
U
N
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
I
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
Ø 1
3
1
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Display shows current transmitter
output level and it will update every
six seconds. Be sure to time your
next key press with an updated
display.
4
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
1
S
F
C
W O R
1
K
N G .
.
.
O U
T
P
3
P
T
3
0
0
1
1
2
.
4
Ø
%
Z
0
Key in 0 (zero) as desired output
signal level in percent.
5
6
O U
Ø
T
_
P
1
P
T
3
1
%
NON-VOL
Put transmitter into constant-current
source mode as noted by “#” sign in
display and set output to 0%.
O U
T
P
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
O U
T
1
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
Ø
.
Ø Ø
%
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3
Calibrating Analog Output Signal, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 57
Step
7
Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
RESET
Calibrate output signal to 0%.
O U
T
P
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
K
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
COR-
RECT
O U
T
1
P
D
T
A
3
0
Z
1
1 #
C
O
R
R E
C
T
C
E R O
Check that milliammeter or voltmeter
reading is 4mA or 1V.
8
If reading is … Then…
correct
go to Step 11.
lower than 4mA go to Step 9.
or 1V
higher than
4mA or 1V
go to Step 10.
H
Gradually raise output to 4mA or 1V
reading. Repeat this Step as
required.
9
O U
T
P
P
P
1
1
P
C
T
3
0
T
1
1 #
1 #
1 #
1 #
NEXT
I
N
C
1
O U N
S
O U
T
P
I
T
3
0
1
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
O U
I
T
1
P
E
T
3
0
1
N C
R
E
A S
D
4 m A
O U
T
P
1
P
D
T
A
3
0
Z
1
C
O
R
R E
C
T
C
E R O
L
Gradually decrease output to 4mA
or 1V reading. Repeat this Step as
required.
10
O U
T
P
1
P
C
T
3
0
T
1
1 #
1 #
1 #
1 #
PREV
D
E
C
1
O U N
S
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
.
1
S
F
C
W O R
1
K
N G .
.
O U
D
T
P
P
E
T
3
0
1
E C
R
E
A S
D
4 m A
O U
T
P
1
P
D
T
A
3
0
Z
1
C
O
R
R E
C
T
C
E R O
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display.
11
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
.
1
1 #
1 #
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
O U
T
P
1
P
T
3
0
1
Present output signal level in
percent.
Ø
.
Ø Ø
%
Continued on next page
186
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3
Calibrating Analog Output Signal, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 57
Step
Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Key in 100 as desired output level in
percent.
12
V
1
O U
1
T
_
P
1
P
T
3
0
1
1
1 #
1 #
%
Z
0
O U
1
T
P
_
1
P
T
3
0
Ø
%
Z
0
.
.
O U
1
T
P
1
1
P
T
3
3
0
0
1
1
1 #
_
Ø Ø
%
NON-VOL
Set output to 100%.
13
14
15
O U
T
P
P
I
T
1 #
1 #
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
O U
T
P
1
P
T
3
0
1
1
Ø Ø . Ø Ø
%
RESET
Calibrate output to 100%.
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1 #
1 #
K
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
COR-
RECT
O U
T
P
1
P
D
T
A
3
0
1
C
O
R
R E
C
T
C
S
P A N
Check that milliammeter or voltmeter
reading is 20mA or 5V.
If reading is … Then…
correct
go to Step 18.
go to Step 16.
lower than
20mA or 5V
higher than
20mA or 5V
go to Step 17.
H
Gradually raise output to 20mA or
5V reading. Repeat this Step as
required.
16
O U
T
P
P
P
1
1
P
C
T
3
0
T
1
1 #
1 #
1 #
NEXT
I
N
C
1
O U N
S
O U
T
P
I
T
3
0
1
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
O U
I
T
1
P
E
T
3
0
1
N C
R
E
A S
D
2
Ø m A
O U
T
P
1
P
D
T
A
3
0
1
1 #
C
O
R
R E
C
T
C
S
P A N
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3
Calibrating Analog Output Signal, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 57
Step
Calibrating Output Signal for Transmitter in Analog Mode, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
L
Gradually decrease output to 20mA
or 5V reading. Repeat this Step as
required.
17
O U
T
P
P
P
1
P
C
T
3
0
T
1
1 #
1 #
1 #
PREV
D
E
C
1
O U N
S
O U
T
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
S
F
C
W O R
1
K
N G .
.
.
O U
D
T
P
E
T
3
0
1
E C
R
E
A S
D
2
Ø m A
O U
T
P
1
P
D
T
A
3
0
1
1 #
C
O
R
R E
C
T
C
S
P A N
Initiate shift key selection
18
O U
T
P
1
P
F
T
T
3
3
0
1
1 #
1 #
^
SHIFT
S
H
I
–
NON-VOL
Saves data in transmitter’s
nonvolatile memory. This takes
approximately 8 seconds.
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
0
.
1
ENTER
(Yes)
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
O U
T
T
P
A
1
P
T
3
0
1
I
1 #
L E
D
A
N
D
O N V O L A T
L
I
N
E
P
P
.
T
3
0
1
1
#
R
A D Y .
.
INPUT
J
OUT-
PUT
Call up output for display.
19
20
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1 #
1 #
S
F
C
W O R
K
N G .
.
.
.
O U
T
1
P
1
P
T
3
0
1
Present output signal level in
percent.
Ø Ø . Ø Ø
%
Exit constant-current source mode.
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1 #
CLR
(NO)
S
L
F
C
W O R
K
.
N G .
.
.
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
0
1
1
R
A D Y .
188
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.4
Calibrating Range with SFC
Background
The ST 3000 Smart Transmitter has two-point calibration. This means
when you calibrate two points in the calibration range all the points in
that range adjust to that calibration.
Procedure
The procedure in Table 58 shows the steps for calibrating a differential
pressure (DP) type transmitter to a range of 0 to 200 inH O for example
2
purposes. This procedure assumes that the transmitter is removed from
the process and located in a controlled environment.
You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0.04% or
better to do a range calibration. Note that we factory calibrate ST 3000
Smart Transmitters with inches of water ranges using inches of water
pressure referenced to a temperature of 39.2 °F (4°C).
ATTENTION
Table 58
Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect power supply and SFC to
signal terminals on transmitter’s terminal power supply, and pressure source
See Figure 52 for typical SFC,
block. Connect a calibration-standard
pressure source to high pressure side of
DP type transmitter.
hookup for calibration.
2
Turn on power supply and allow
transmitter to stabilize its operation for
approximately 30 minutes.
3
4
Turn on SFC.
DE READ
Does not apply for bench calibration.
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
K
C
I
U
N
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
5
Acknowledge prompt and establish
communications with sample
transmitter PT 3011 to be calibrated.
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
Ø 1
3
1
6
7
Adjust pressure source to apply
pressure equal to LRV (0%)
Present LRV setting. If displayed
value does not match applied
pressure, key in matching LRV
value or adjust pressure
accordingly.
E
LRV
0%
L
L
R
Ø
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
.
_
Ø Ø Ø Ø
H
2
O
3
9 F
"
RESET
8
Prompt asks if LRV is to be
calibrated to applied reference
pressure. If it is to be calibrated, go
to next Step. If it isn’t, press [CLR]
key and try again.
R
V
1
P
T
T
3
Ø 1
1
K
C
O R R E
C
L R V ?
COR-
RECT
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.4
Calibrating Range with SFC, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 58
Step
9
Calibrating Measurement Range With SFC, continued
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
NON-VOL
Calibrates LRV to reference input
pressure for zero calibration.
L
R
F
V
1
P
I
T
3
.
Ø 1
1
1
S
C
W O R
K
N
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
R
L
V
1
P
R
T
3
T
Ø 1
E D
R
V
C
O R
E C
L
R
Ø
V
1
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
.
_
Ø Ø Ø Ø
H
2
O
3
9 F
"
Adjust pressure source to apply
pressure equal to URV (100%)
10
11
F
Present URV setting. If displayed
value does not match applied
U
R
2
V
1
.
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
URV
100%
_
3
Ø Ø
Ø Ø
H
2
O
9 F
"
pressure, key in matching URV
value or adjust pressure accordingly
before you press [CORRECT] key in
next step.
RESET
Ø
1
Prompt asks if URV is to be
calibrated to applied reference
pressure. If it is to be calibrated, go
to next Step. If it isn’t, press [CLR]
key and try again.
12
13
U
R
V
1
P
T
T
3
1
K
C
O R R E
C
K
U R V ?
COR-
RECT
NON-VOL
Calibrates URV to reference input
pressure for span (100%)
calibration.
U
S
R
F
V
C
1
P
I
T
3
.
Ø 1
1
1
W O R
N
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
Ø
U
R
V
1
P
R
T
3
T
1
U R
V
C
O R
E C
E D
U
R
2
V
1
.
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
_
Ø Ø
Ø Ø
H
2
O
3
9 F
"
Initiate shift key selection
14
U
R
V
1
P
F
T
T
3
Ø 1
Ø 1
1
1
^
SHIFT
S
H
I
–
NON-VOL
Saves data in transmitter’s
nonvolatile memory. This takes
approximately 8 seconds.
U
S
R
F
V
1
P
I
T
3
.
ENTER
(Yes)
C
W O R
1
K
N
G
.
.
U
D
R
A
V
T
P
V
T
3
Ø 1
1
A
N
O N
O L A T
I
L E
L
I
N
E
D
P
R
A D Y .
.
.
Continued on next page
190
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.4
Calibrating Range with SFC, Continued
Procedure, continued
Figure 52
Typical Calibration Hookup.
ST 3000
+ Red
+
-
24Vdc
Power
Supply
250
Ω
- Black
Low
Pressure
Head
DVM
(See NOTES)
Dead Weight
Tester
(See NOTES)
SFC
NOTES: The digital voltmeter must have a 0.02% accuracy or better.
The calibration-standard input source must have a 0.02% accuracy.
The 250 ohm resistor must have a 0.01% tolerance or better.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5
Resetting Calibration
Background
You can erase incorrect calibration data by resetting the data to default
values through the SFC. The default values return the transmitter
calibration to the original factory “characterization” values.
Characterization calculates a mathematical model of the performance of
the transmitter’s sensors and then stores that data in the transmitter’s
memory. Note that this is not the “final calibration” which is done at the
end of the process against the ordered range.
While resetting the calibration will return the transmitter to a close
approximation of the previous calibration using its stored
characterization data, the accuracy of the “reset” transmitter will be
lower than the specified final calibrated accuracy. The calibration is not
exact since the transmitter mounting angle may be different than the
factory mounting angle. This means that the transmitter is calculating its
output based on the characterization equation alone without any
compensation for the small residual errors of zero offset and span
correction.
For example, a typical zero offset correction is less than 0.1 inH2O for a
400 inH2O range and a typical span correction is less than 0.2%
regardless of the range (down to the point where specification turndown
begins). The typical performance of a 400 inH2O transmitter after a
calibration reset (or a “Corrects Reset” as it is often called) can be
expressed as:
⎛
0.1 inH2O ⎞
⎜
⎟
⎝ Span inH2O⎠
Accuracy = 0.2% +
• 100%
By correcting the zero input, the typical performance will be 0.2% or
better.
For other transmitter ranges, the initial zero offset will be scaled by the
ratio of the Upper Range Limit (URL) to 400 inH2O at 39.2°F (4°C).
Thus, for a 100 psi range, the initial zero offset can be expressed by:
2768inH2
O
0.1inH2O •
= 0.7inH2O or 0.025psi
400inH2
O
Note that these are typical values and they may vary. However, our
patented characterization method includes several techniques which
help to ensure that this level of performance can be achieved.
Continued on next page
192
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5
Resetting Calibration, Continued
Procedure
The procedure in Table 59 shows how to reset calibration data in a
transmitter with an SFC.
Table 59
Resetting Calibration Data With SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring and
turn it on.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
2
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
K
C
U
N
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
3
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
I
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
Ø 1
3
1
Initiate shift key selection
4
L
I
N
D
S
P
H
P
F
T
T
3
0
1
1
^
SHIFT
I
–
RESET
Prompt asks if you want to correct
calibration data by resetting it to
default values. If you do want to
reset data, go to next Step. If you
don’t, press [CLR] key to exit
function.
P
T
3
0
1
1
K
COR-
R
E
S
E T
C
O R
R
E C T S ?
RECT
NON-VOL
Previous calibration “CORRECTS”
are removed and calibration is reset
to default characterization values as
indicated by non-critical status
symbol “#” on right-hand side of
display. Symbol remains on display
until transmitter is recalibrated.
5
P
T
3
0
.
1
.
1
#
S
C
F
C
W O R
K
S
.
I
N
G .
ENTER
(Yes)
P
T
T
3
0
1
1 #
O R
R
E
C
D
T
P
R
E S E T
L
I
N
E
P
.
3
0
1
1
#
R
A D Y .
ATTENTION
The accuracy of the
reset transmitter will be
approximately 0.2% at reference
conditions – See the Background
paragraph in this section for more
details. .
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 11 —Troubleshooting
11.1
Introduction
Section Contents
This section includes these topics
Section
Topic
See Page
11.1 Introduction ................................................................................195
11.2 Overview ....................................................................................196
11.3 Clearing the “#” Symbol From SFC Display ...............................197
11.4 Diagnostic Messages.................................................................199
11.5 Running Status Check ...............................................................202
11.6 Interpreting Messages................................................................203
11.7 Checking SFC Display and Keyboard........................................207
About this section
This section identifies diagnostic messages that may appear in the SFC
and describes what they mean. An interpretation of diagnostic messages
is given which suggests possible cause and corrective action for each
message. Procedures are provided for running a status check and testing
the SFC keyboard.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.2
Overview
Diagnostics
The SFC and ST 3000 transmitter are constantly running internal
diagnostics to monitor the functions and status of the control loop and
their communications link.
When a diagnostic failure is detected, a corresponding message is
generated for the SFC display. See Section 11.4 Diagnostic Messages
for details.
There are additional diagnostics provided by the STIMV IOP for
transmitters integrated with the TPS system and any message will
appear in the TRANSMITTER STATUS field of the Detail Display in
the Universal Station. Details about the STIMV IOP diagnostic
messages are given in the PM/APM Smartline Transmitter Integration
ATTENTION
X
Manual PM12-410 which is part of the TDC 3000 system bookset.
Troubleshooting tool
Your primary troubleshooting tool is using the SFC to run a status
check, recording displayed diagnostic messages, and then interpreting
the diagnostic messages. See Table 66 to run a status check using an
SFC.
You should also use the SFC to verify the transmitter’s configuration
data and check to be sure your process is operating correctly.
196
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.3
Clearing the “#” Symbol From SFC Display
About the “#” symbol
When transmitter diagnostics detect a non-critical status condition, the
number symbol “#” appears as the last character in the top row of the
SFC display along with whatever you are displaying at the time. Thus,
the purpose of the # symbol is simply to let you know that a non-critical
status condition exists.
Procedure
To clear the # symbol from the SFC display, you must first determine
what non-critical status condition exists and then correct it. The general
procedure would be:
• Press [STAT] key on SFC and record diagnostic messages that appear in
bottom row of display.
• Use Table 60 as an aid in determining the possible cause of the
diagnostic message and the suggested corrective action to take to clear
the # symbol.
• The # symbol will disappear from the display when the diagnostic
condition is corrected.
Table 60
Clearing the # Symbol from the SFC Display
If Message is. . .
Then, Possible Cause is. . .
And, Suggested Corrective
Action is. . .
All calibration “CORRECTS” were Recalibrate transmitter.
deleted and data was reset to
default characterization values.
S
C
T
A
T
U
E
S
C
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
O R
R
T
S
R
N
E S E T
SPAN correction factor is outside Check input pressure and be sure it
S
T
A
C
T
E
U
S
S
P
T
3
3
0
1
1
#
acceptable limits. Could be that
transmitter was in output mode.
matches calibrated range value.
Check meter body. Do a URV
CORRECT procedure.
E
X
S
S
P
A
C O R R
ZERO correction factor is outside Check input pressure and be sure it
S
E
T
X
A
C
T
E
U
S
S
S
P
E
T
0
1
1
#
acceptable limits. Could be that
either INPUT was zero or
transmitter was in output mode
during a CORRECT procedure.
matches calibrated range value.
Check meter body. Do a LRV
CORRECT procedure.
Z
R
O
C O R R
Transmitter is operating as a
current source.
Press [OUTPUT] and [CLR] keys to tell
transmitter to exit output mode.
S
T
A
T U
S
P
T
T
3
0
1
1 #
I
N
O U T P U
M O D E
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.3
Clearing the “#” Symbol From SFC Display, Continued
Procedure, continued
Table 60
Clearing the # Symbol from the SFC Display, continued
If Message is. . .
Then, Possible Cause is. . .
And, Suggested Corrective
Action is. . .
Pressure input is two times
greater than URL of transmitter.
•
•
Check range and, if required,
replace transmitter with one that
has a wider range.
S
T
A
.
T U
B .
S
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
M
O
V E
R
L O A D
Meter body may have been
damaged. Check the transmitter
for accuracy and linearity
Replace meter body and
recalibrate, if needed.
OR
S
T
E
A
T
T U
E R
S
B
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
T
M
O
D Y
F A U L
No temperature compensation
data exists for D/A converter.
S
N
T
A
T
U
S
P
T
3
0
1
1
Effect will be minor degradation of
ambient temperature influence
specifications. Replace electronics
module
#
O
D A
C
T
E
M
P
C O M P
Meter body temperature is too
high. Accuracy and life span may from temperature source.
decrease if it remains high.
Take steps to insulate meter body
S
S
T
A
N
T U
S
P
T
E
3
0
1
1 #
E
S O R
O V
R T E M P
Selection is unknown
Be sure SFC software is latest
version. Press SHIFT and 3 to view
SFC software version.
S
U
T
A
K
T U
S
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
N
N O W N
198
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.4
Diagnostic Messages
Summary
The diagnostic messages can be grouped into one of these five
categories.
• Non-Critical Failures — Transmitter continues to calculate PV output.
• Critical Failures — Transmitter drives PV output to failsafe state.
• Communications Errors
• Invalid Key Entry Errors
• Interrupt Messages
A description of the messages in each category is given in the following
paragraphs. Note that there also a few messages that we have grouped as
general interrupt messages at the end of this section.
Non-critical failures
Table 61 summarizes the non-critical SFC status message displays. All
SFC functions remain operational during a non-critical failure and the
“#” sign appears on the right hand side of the display.
Table 61
Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Non-Critical Failures
Message
Description
Must recalibrate transmitter to attain required accuracy.
S
C
T
A
T U
S
C
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
O R
R
E
T
S
R
E S E T
S
E
T
A
C
T
E
U
S
S
S
P
T
3
3
0
1
1
SPAN correction factor is outside the acceptable limits
for accurate operation.
#
X
S
P
A
N
O
C O R R
S
E
T
X
A
C
T
E
U
S
S
S
P
E
T
0
1
1
Zero calibration value is too large. Excess zero
correction may be an indication of a problem with the
process or installation.
#
Z
R
C O R R
Transmitter is operating as current source.
S
S
T
A
T U
S
P
T
T
3
0
1
1 #
I
N
O U
T
P U
M O D E
Input pressure is more that 2 times greater than the
Upper Range Limit of the transmitter.
T
A
.
T U
S
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
M
B .
O
V E
R
L O A D
OR
S
T
E
A
T
T U
E R
S
B
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
T
M
O
D Y
F A U L
S
N
T
A
T
U
S
P
T
3
0
1
1
No temperature compensation data exists for D/A
converter.
#
O
D A
C
T
E
M
P
C O M P
Meter body temperature is too high.
S
S
T
A
N
T U
S
P
T
E
3
0
1
1 #
E
S O R
O V
R T E M P
Status is unknown.
S
U
T
A
K
T U
S
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
N
N O W N
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.4
Diagnostic Messages, Continued
Critical failures
Table 62 summarizes the critical SFC status message displays. A critical
failure has these effects on SFC operation.
• Only ID, OUTPUT, and STATUS functions remain operational.
• The critical status message is displayed for three seconds followed by
the applicable status message. Run the status check to view messages
again.
• The transmitter’s output is driven to its failsafe direction - upscale or
downscale.
Table 62
Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Critical Failures
Message
Description
Characterization PROM failure.
O U
T
P
1
P
T
3
0
1
1
T
C
H
A R
P R O M
F A U L
O
E
U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
3
3
3
3
0
<
1
1
No temperature compensation data exists for
calculations.
L
E C
T
T
T
R
O N
O N
O N
O N
C
S
S
S
S
F
A >
O
E
U
T
P
1
P
I
T
0
<
1
1
Transmitter’s nonvolatile memory (NVM) fault.
L
E C
R
C
B >
O
E
U
T
P
1
P
I
T
0
<
1
1
Transmitter’s random access memory (RAM) fault.
L
E C
R
C
C >
O
E
U
T
P
1
P
I
T
0
<
1
1
Transmitter’s programmable read only memory (PROM)
fault.
L
E C
T
R
C
D >
S
T
A
T
T
E
U
S
P
Y
T
0
1
1
T
Electronics (PWA) and meter body are incompatible.
M E
R B
O
T
D
A U L
Possible meter body or electronics based problem.
O U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
S
U
S P
E
C
N
P U T
Communication
errors
Table 63 summarizes the message displays associated with
communication errors. A communication error has these effects on SFC
operation.
• All the SFC functions are disabled.
• Communication error messages are cycled in the display at two second
intervals. Press [ID] and then [ENTER] to view messages again.
Table 63
Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors
Message
Description
Communications is unsuccessful.
T
E
A
N
G
D
N
A
O .
R
O U
N
D
E R R
SFC failed a communication diagnostic test.
Loop resistance is too large or supply voltage is too low.
Illegal response from transmitter.
T
F
A
A
G
I
N
E
O .
D
L
C
/
O M M
C H K
T
A
H
G
I
N
R
O .
E
S
L
O
E
V O L
T
T
I
A
L
G
L
N
O .
E G A
L
R
S
P O N S E
Continued on next page
200
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.4
Diagnostic Messages, Continued
Communication
errors, continued
Table 63
Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Communication Errors, continued
Message
Description
Transmitter database was incorrect at powerup.
T
I
A
N
G
V
N
O .
A L
I
D
D
R
A
E
T
A B A S E
Request is invalid.
T
I
A
N
G
V
N
O .
A L
I
D
Q U E S T
Loop resistance is too low.
No response from transmitter.
SFC is not operating properly.
T
A
L
G
N
O .
O W
L
O O P
R
S
E S
T
A
G
X
N
O .
N
O
M T
R
R
T
E
P O N S E
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
F
O .
A
U
L
Invalid key entry
errors
Table 64 summarizes the message displays for possible invalid key
entry errors.
Table 64
Summary of Diagnostic Messages for Invalid Key Entry Errors
Message
None - Keystroke makes display blink
Description
Invalid keystroke
The computed SFC value is outside the display range.
U
R
>
V
R
1
.
P T
3
0
_
1
3
1
A N G E
H
2
O
9 F
"
Interrupt messages
Table 65 summarizes messages that may interrupt the SFC display.
Table 65
Summary of Interrupt Messages For SFC Display
Message
Meaning
Remedy
Diagnostics has detected a
critical failure.
O U
T
I
P
T
1
P
T
S
3
0
1
1
Press [STAT] key to retrieve
messages.
S
C
R
I
C
A
P
L
T
A T U
The SFC battery is low.
Recharge the battery.
Colon
A
L
I
N
D
G
N O .
:
P
T
3
Ø 1
1
Diagnostics has detected a
non-critical failure. Or, the
transmitter is in its output
mode.
Press [STAT] key to retrieve
messages or exit the output
mode.
Number Symbol
L
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
0
1
1
#
R
A D Y .
.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.5
Running Status Check
Procedure
The procedure in Table 66 shows how to run a status check using the
SFC.
Table 66
Running a Status Check With SFC
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Description
Connect SFC across loop wiring for
transmitter whose status is to be
checked
Be sure to put analog loop into
manual mode.
DE READ
Be sure any switches that may trip
alarms or interlocks associated with
analog loop are secured or turned
off.
2
3
T
T
A
R
G
I
N
O .
A
P S
S
E
C
U
R
E D ?
?
ID
NON-VOL
Confirm that “TRIPS” are secured
and establish communications with
sample transmitter PT 3011
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
O .
W O R
K
I
N
G .
G
.
.
ENTER
(Yes)
L
I
N
D
P
T
P
A
T
N O .
Ø 1
ATTENTION
3
1
If a communications
error is detected, applicable
diagnostic messages will cycle at
two-second intervals in the display
and then display returns to the
prompt PUT LOOP IN MAN. Repeat
Steps 2 and 3 to view messages
again. Communications is not
established and all SFC functions
are disabled.
F/S DIR
U
Initiate status check.
4
S
S
T
F
A
C
T U
S
P
I
T
3
0
.
1
.
1
W O R
K
C
N
G .
STAT
S
S
T
T
A
A
T U
S
P
H
T
3
0
1
1
Transmitter and SFC are operating
normally.
T
U S
E C K = O K
OR
S
S
T
E
A
N
T U
S
P
T
E
3
0
1
1 #
Diagnostic message appears for
detected fault.
S O R
O V
R T E M P
OR
S
C
T
A
I
T U
S
C
P
T
S
3
0
1
1
Critical status appears followed by
applicable diagnostic messages.
R
T
I
A
C
L
T
A T U S
S
T
S
A
U
T U
S
P
T
I
3
0
1
1
S
P E
T
N
P U T
THEN
Signals end of status messages for
display. Press [STAT] key to display
messages again. When there are two
or more messages, they are cycled in
display at 5-second intervals.
L
I
N
E
D
P
P
.
T
3
0
1
1
R
A D Y .
.
202
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.6
Interpreting Messages
Interpretation table
Most of the diagnostic messages that can be displayed on the SFC are
listed in alphabetical order in Table 67 along with a description and
suggested action to be taken.
Table 67
Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table
Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
Characterization PROM is not
functioning correctly.
Replace meter body.
S
C
T
A T
A R
U
S
P
T
T
3
0
1
1
T
H
P R O M
F A U L
All calibration “CORRECTS” were Recalibrate transmitter.
deleted and data was reset to
default values.
S
C
T
A
T U
S
C
P
3
0
1
1 #
O R
R
E
T
S
R
S
E S E T
O
E
U
T
P
1
P
T
3
0
<
1
1
No temperature compensation
data exists for calculations.
Effect will be minor degradation of
L
E C
T
R
O N
I
C
A >
ambient temperature influence
specifications. Replace electronics
module (PWA).
Transmitter’s nonvolatile memory Replace electronics module (PWA).
fault.
O
E
U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
3
3
0
<
1
1
L
E C
T
T
T
R
O N
O N
O N
O U
C
S
S
S
B >
Transmitter’s random access
memory (RAM) fault.
Replace electronics module (PWA).
O
E
U
T
P
1
P
I
T
0
<
1
1
L
E C
R
C
C >
Transmitter’s programmable read Replace electronics module (PWA).
only memory (PROM) fault.
O
E
U
T
P
1
P
I
T
0
<
1
1
L
E C
R
C
D >
Communications unsuccessful.
Check loop wiring and SFC
connections. If error persists,
replace transmitter.
T
E
A
N
G
D
N
O .
A
R
N
D
E R R
SPAN correction factor is outside Check input pressure and be sure it
S
E
T
A
C
T
E
U
S
S
S
P
P
T
A
3
0
1
1
#
acceptable limits. Could be that
transmitter was in output mode.
matches calibrated range value.
Check meter body. Do a URV
CORRECT procedure.
X
S
Z
N
O
C O R R
ZERO correction factor is outside Check input pressure and be sure it
S
E
T
X
A
C
T
E
U
S
S
S
P
E
T
3
0
1
1
#
acceptable limits. Could be that
either INPUT was incorrect or
transmitter was in output mode
during a CORRECT procedure.
matches calibrated range value.
Check meter body. Do an LRV
CORRECT procedure.
R
C O R R
SFC failed a communications
diagnostic check. Could be an
SFC electronic problem or a faulty
or dead communication loop.
•
•
Check polarity and try again.
T
F
A
G
N
E
O .
A
I
L
D
C
O M M
C H K
Press [STAT] and do any
corrective action required and try
again.
•
•
Check communication loop.
Replace SFC.
Either there is too much
resistance in loop (open circuit),
voltage is too low, or both.
Check polarity, wiring, and power
supply. There must be 11 volts
minimum at transmitter to permit
operation. Check for defective or
misapplied capacitive or inductive
devices (I/Ps) on the loop wiring.
T
A
H
G
I
N
R
O .
E
S
/
L
O
V O L
T
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.6
Interpreting Messages, Continued
Interpretation table,
continued
Table 67
Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table, continued
Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
Hardware mismatch. Part of
Save/Restore function.
Nothing – SFC tried to restore as
much of database as possible.
S
S
A
H
V
.
E
/
R
E S
T
O R
E
W .
M
I
S M A T C H
Transmitter is operating as a
current source.
Press [OUTPUT] and [CLR] keys to tell
transmitter to exit output mode.
T
I
A
N
T U
S
P
T
T
3
0
1
1 #
O U
T
P U
M O D E
Transmitter sent illegal response
to SFC
Try communicating again.
T
I
A
L
G
L
N
O .
E G A
L
R
E
A
S
T
P O N S E
A B A S E
Transmitter database was
incorrect at powerup.
•
•
Try communicating again.
T
I
A
N
G
V
N
O .
A L
I
D
D
Verify database configuration.
Manually update non-volatile
memory with each parameter.
•
•
Requesting transmitter to
correct or set its URV to a
value which results in too
small a span, or correct its
LRV or URV while in output
mode.
•
•
Check that correct URV
U
R
I
V
N
1
.
I
P T
3
0
1
1
calibration pressure is being
applied to transmitter, or that
transmitter is not in output mode.
V A
L
D
R
E Q U E S T
Keystroke is not valid for given
transmitter.
Check that keystroke is
applicable for given transmitter.
Not enough resistance in series
with communication loop.
Check sensing resistor and increase
resistance to at least 250Ω.
T
S
A
L
G
N
O .
O W
L
O O P
R
E S
Pressure input is two times
greater than URL of transmitter.
•
•
Check range and, if required,
replace transmitter with one that
has a wider range.
T
A
.
T U
S
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
M
B .
O
V E
R
L O A D
Meter body may have been
damaged. Check the transmitter
for accuracy and linearity
Replace meter body and
recalibrate, if needed.
OR
S
T
E
A
T
T U
E R
S
B
P
T
T
3
0
1
1 #
T
M
O
O
D Y
F A U L
Electronics (PWA) and meter
body are incompatible.
Obtain matching meter body for
given transmitter model and series.
Check transmitter nameplate for
model number data.
S
T
A
T
U
S
P
3
0
1
1
M E
T
E
R B
D
Y
F
A U L
T
Transmitter sent a negative
response because it could not
process one or more commands.
Check configuration and try again.
S
T
A
T U
S
P
E
T
S
3
0
1
1
N
A
C
K
R
P O N S E
Continued on next page
204
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.6
Interpreting Messages, Continued
Interpretation table,
continued
Table 67
Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table, continued
Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
No response from transmitter.
Could be transmitter or loop
failure.
•
•
Try communicating again.
T
A
G
N
O .
N
O
X
M T
R
R
E
S P O N S E
Press [ID] key and do any
corrective action required and try
again.
•
Check that transmitter’s loop
integrity has been maintained,
that SFC is connected properly,
and that loop resistance is at
least 250 Ω.
SFC’s CPU is misconfigured.
Replace SFC.
S
S
T
A
V
T U
M
S
P
S
T
E
3
0
1
1
N
O N
E
M A
N
On a database restore, one or
more options do not match.
Nothing - SFC tried to restore as
much of database as possible.
A
V
T
E
I
/
R
E S
T
I
O R
E
O P
O N
M
S M A T C H
Database restore function failed.
Check transmitter and try again.
S
A
R
V
E
E
/
R
E S
T
O R
E
I
S T O R E
F
A
L
0
E D
1 #
Meter body temperature is too
high. Accuracy and life span may from temperature source.
decrease if it remains high.
Take steps to insulate meter body
S
S
T
E
A
N
T U
S
P
T
E
3
1
S O R
O V
R T E M P
Transmitter’s temperature sensor Replace transmitter.
has failed.
S
S
T
E
A
N
T U
S
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
S O R
T
L
E
M
P
F A
I
L
SFC is operating incorrectly.
Try communicating again. If error
still exists, replace SFC.
T
S
A
F
G
C
N
F
O .
A
U
T
Input data seems wrong. Could
be a process problem, but it could press [STAT] key. Diagnostic
Put transmitter in output mode and
O U
S U
T
P
1
P
I
T
3
0
1
1
S P
E
C
T
N
P U T
also be a meter body or PWA
problem.
messages should identify where
problem is. If no other diagnostic
message is given, condition is most
likely meter body related. Check
installation and replace meter body
if condition persists.
On database restore, transmitter
types do not match.
Nothing - SFC tried to restore as
much of database as possible.
S
A
V
T
E
/
R
E
E S
M
T
I
O R
E
Y P
S M A T C H
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.6
Interpreting Messages, Continued
Interpretation table,
continued
Table 67
Diagnostic Message Interpretation Table, continued
Message
Possible Cause
What to Do
Selection is unknown.
Be sure SFC software is latest
version. Press SHIFT and 3 to view
SFC software version.
S
U
T
A
K
T U
S
P
T
3
0
1
1 #
N
N O W N
Transmitter’s write protect jumper If authorized, move W/R jumper on
U
R
V
1
T
.
P T
3
0
1
1
is in its read only position.
PWA, make configuration change,
then move back W/R jumper on
PWA.
W R
I
E
P R O T E C T E D
Value calculation is greater than
display range.
Press [CLR] key and start again. Be
sure special units conversion factor
is not greater than display range.
U
R
>
V
R
1
.
P T
3
0
_
1
3
1
A N G E
H
2
O
9 F
"
206
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.7
Checking SFC Display and Keyboard
Procedure
The procedure in Table 68 shows how to run an SFC display and
keyboard test.
Table 68
Running SFC Display and Keyboard Test
Step
1
Press Key
Read Display or Action
Turn on SFC
Description
Initiate shift key selection.
All display segments are working.
2
P
U
T
L
O
S
O P
I
N
M A N
^
SHIFT
H
I
F
T –
W
2
D
I
S P
L
A
L
Y
A
T
E
S T
K A Y
D
I
S
P
Y
O
* *
* *
*
K
r
E Y B O A
R
c
D
o
T
u
E S
m n
T
Ready to check operation of
individual keys.
o
w
l
l
*
E
LRV
0%
3
K
r
E Y B O A
R
c
D
o
T
u
E S
m n
T
Confirm key operation by verifying
that its row and column location on
keyboard are displayed
o
w
2
1
Repeat Step 3 as required to check all
keys or go to Step 5 to exit test.
4
5
NON-VOL
K
r
E Y B O A
R
c
D
o
T
u
E S
m n
T
Check [ENTER] key location.
o
w
8
l
4
ENTER
(Yes)
Ready for operation.
P
U
T
L
O
O P
I
N
M A N
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 12 —Parts List
12.1
Replacement Parts
Part identification
• All individually salable parts are indicated in each figure by key
number callout. For example, 1, 2, 3, and so on.
• All parts that are supplied in kits are indicated in each Figure by key
number callout with the letter “K” prefix. For example, K1, K2, K3,
and so on.
• Parts denoted with a “†” are recommended spares. See Table 81 for
summary list of recommended spare parts.
Figure 53 shows major parts for given model with parts list Figure
references.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 53
Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.
ST 3000 Release 300
Electronic Housing Assembly
See Figures 55 and 56
Meter Bodies
LGP/LAP
Models
See
Figure
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
Single Head
GP Models
STG140
STG170
STG180
See
Figure
59
59
59
DP
See
Figure
57
57
57
57
57
57,58
57,58
57,58
57,58
Dual Head
GP Models
STG944
See
Figure
60
STG14L
STG17L
STG18L
STG90L
STG94L
STG97L
STG98L
STA12L
STA92L
STA14L
STA94L
Models
STD110
STD120
STD125
STD130
STD170
STD904
STD924
STD930
STD974
STG974
60
Single Head
AP Models
STA122
STA140
STA922
See
Figure
59
59
59
STA940
59
Remote Diaphragm Seal
Models
Flush Mount
GP Models
STG93P
See
Figure
62
STR12D
STR13D
STR14A
STR93D
LGP Models
STR14G
STR17G
STR94G
Flange
Mounted
Models
See
Figure
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
STF128
STF132
STF12F
STF13F
STF14F
STF924
STF932
STF92F
STF93F
Attention: No replacement meter body is
available for Remote Diaphragm Seal Models.
63
63
High
Temperature
Models
STG14T
STF14T
See
Figure
64
64
Continued on next page
210
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 54
ST 3000 Transmitter Mounting Bracket Parts Reference.
Angle
Mounting
Bracket
2
1
4
3
Flat
Mounting
Bracket
Table 69
Major ST 3000 Smart Transmitter Parts Reference.
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
30752770-003
Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush mount
1
30752770-004
51196557-001
51196557-002
Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,
STR17G, and STR94G
2
Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush Mount
3
4
Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models LGP, Flush mount, STR14G,
STR17G, and STR94G
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 55
Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Electronics/Meter End.
4
6
K1
2
1
5
Figure 56
Series 100/900 Electronics Housing - Terminal Block End
1
K1
3/K2
Continued on next page
212
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 70
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figures 55 and 56
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
30756961-501
30756961-502
Cap for Series 900 only
Cap for Series 100 only
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
30756996-501
30756996-502
Cap, meter for Series 900 only
Cap, meter for Series 100 only
51205897-501†
51404078-502†
Terminal assembly without lightning protection
Terminal assembly with lightning protection
51309389-501
51309389-502
51309389-503
Local Zero and Span Adjust Only
Local Smart Meter Only
Local Smart Meter With Zero and Span Adjust
51309397-501
51309397-504
51309397-511
51309397-514
51309397-506
51309397-507
51309397-516
51309397-517
Analog Only Electronics, Transmitter Option AN
Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,4G
Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,NE
Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,NE,4G
DE/Analog Electronics, Option DE
DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,4G
DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,NE
DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,NE,4G
1
5
51204038-001
30756997-501
30757503-001†
51197425-001
Retaining Clip
1
1
6
7
Analog meter
Electronics housing seals kit (includes O-rings)
K1
K2
Terminal assembly without lightning protection conversion kit (includes
screws, cover, and terminal block)
51197425-002
30757504-001
Terminal assembly with lightning protection conversion kit (includes
screws, cover, and terminal block)
Electronics housing hardware kit, DP/I, GP/I, LGP/I (includes screws,
gasket, plate, washers, cover terminal, and spacers)
Not
Shown
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 57
Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 & STD930 C, D, G,
H, K, and L and STD974
K2
K1
K3
K4
K3
K2
K7
K1
K3
K2
K1
K5
K3
K6
1
K6
K5
K8
K1
Continued on next page
214
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 71
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57.
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without heads
1
1
1
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
30757104-001
Adapter, meter body to electronics housing
2
30753790-001
Not Shown
Carbon steel bolts and nuts kit
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter
Nut, hex, metric, M12, process heads
Bolt, hex head, metric, M12, 90mm lg., process heads
A286 SS (NACE) bolts and 302/304 SS (NACE) nuts kit
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter
Nut, hex, metric, M12, process heads
Bolt, hex head, metric, M12, 90mm lg., process heads
St. steel vent/drain and plug kit
4
4
4
K4
K8
30753791-002
Not Shown
4
4
4
K4
K8
30753785-001
30753787-001
30753786-001
Pipe plug
4
2
2
K1
K2
K3
Vent plug (all except model STD110)
Vent bushing (all except model STD110)
Monel vent/drain and plug kit
Pipe plug
4
2
2
K1
K2
K3
Vent plug (all except model STD110)
Vent bushing (all except model STD110)
Hastelloy C vent/drain and plug kit
Pipe plug
4
2
2
K1
K2
K3
Vent plug (all except model STD110)
Vent bushing (all except model STD110)
Process head gasket kit (PTFE material)
Process head gasket kit for (Viton material)
30753788-003†
30753788-004†
Head gasket [For gasket only: 30756445-501 (PTFE, quantity 12) or
30749274-501 (6 Viton head O-rings and 6 Vition flange adapter O-
rings)]
6
K6
O-ring
3
6
K7
K9
Not Shown
Gasket, flange adapter (for gasket only: 30679622-501, 6 Teflon; or
30749274-002, 6 Viton)
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 71
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57, continued
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Optional Flange Adapter Kits (two heads) - Not Shown
30754419-002
30754419-004
30754419-018
30754419-020
Not Shown
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter
Gasket, flange adapter
4
2
2
2
K9
Not Shown
K11
K10
K12
Not Shown
Flange adapter
Not Shown
Filter screen
30754419-003
30754419-019
Not Shown
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., optional flange adapter
Gasket, flange adapter
4
2
2
K9
Not Shown
K11
K10
Not Shown
Flange adapter
Process Head Kits (one head with PTFE head gasket)
30753908-001
30753908-002
30753908-003
30753908-004
30753908-005
30753908-009
30753908-010
30753908-011
Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C head)
Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C DIN head)
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head with side vent/drain)
Process head assembly kit (st. steel head with side vent/drain)
Process head assembly kit (Monel head)
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head without side vent/drain)
Process head assembly kit (stainless steel head without side vent/drain)
Process head assembly kit (stainless steel DIN head without side
vent/drain)
30753908-012
30753908-013
30753908-014
30753908-015
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head - model STD110 only)
Process head assembly kit (st. steel head - model STD110 only)
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel DIN head - model STD110 only)
Process head assembly kit (st. steel DIN head - model STD110 only)
Pipe plug
2
1
1
1
1
1
K1
K2
Vent plug
Vent bushing
K3
Process head
K5
Gasket (PTFE), process head
Gasket (PTFE), optional flange adapter
K6
K11
Continued on next page
216
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 71
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 57, continued
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Process Head Kits (one head with Viton head gasket)
30753908-101
30753908-102
30753908-103
30753908-104
30753908-105
30753908-109
30753908-110
30753908-111
Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C head)
Process head assembly kit (Hastelloy C DIN head)
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head with side vent/drain)
Process head assembly kit (st. steel head with side vent/drain)
Process head assembly kit (Monel head)
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head without side vent/drain)
Process head assembly kit (stainless steel head without side vent/drain)
Process head assembly kit (stainless steel DIN head without side
vent/drain)
30753908-112
30753908-113
30753908-114
30753908-115
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel head - model STD110 only)
Process head assembly kit (st. steel head - model STD110 only)
Process head assembly kit (carbon steel DIN head - model STD110 only)
Process head assembly kit (st. steel DIN head - model STD110 only)
K1
K2
K3
K6
K11
K5
Pipe plug
Vent plug
Vent bushing
Gasket (Viton), process head
Gasket (PTFE), flange adapter
Process head
2
1
1
1
1
1
Figure 58
Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models Models STD924 & STD930 A, B, E, F, and J
K1
K2
K3
K3
K2
K1
1
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 72
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 58
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads
1
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
30757506-001
30757507-001
30757507-002
30757147-001†
Head bolts carbon steel
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
K1
4
Head bolts stainless steel/NACE
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
4
Process Head Bolting 3/8 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Kit
Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts
4
Replacement heads carbon steel
K2
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, head gaskets
Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30757147-002
30757148-001
30757148-002
30757149-001
30757500-001
30757505-001†
Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, head
gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head gaskets
Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent Plugs, Gaskets
Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head
gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent Plugs, Gaskets
Replacement heads Hastelloy
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head gaskets Teflon, Head gaskets
Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
Replacement heads Monel
Kit includes: Head with side vents, Head gasket Teflon, Head gasket
Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
Process Head Gasket Kit
K3
Kit includes: 6 Teflon head gaskets (30757100-001), 6 Viton head
gaskets (30749274-004), and 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets
(30679622-501)
Optional Flange Adapter and Flange Adapter Gaskets - Not Shown
30679622-501
Flange adapter gaskets Teflon
6
6
30749274-502
30754419-002
30754419-018
Not Shown
Flange adapter gaskets Viton
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., flange adapter
Gasket, flange adapter
4
2
2
2
K9
Not Shown
K11
K10
K12
Not Shown
Flange adapter
Not Shown
Filter screen
30754419-003
30754419-019
Not Shown
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts)
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg., optional flange adapter
Gasket, flange adapter
4
2
2
K9
Not Shown
K11
K10
Not Shown
Flange adapter
Continued on next page
218
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 59
Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body
K2
K4
2
K3
1
K1
Table 73
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
See Table 74
Process head (GP/AP models)
1
1
2
1
Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models)
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without head (GP/AP Models)
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
30754154-002†
Head gasket kit for all models with narrow profile meter body except
STG180 (3 sets)
30754154-003†
Head gasket kit for model STG180 with narrow profile meter body (3 sets)
O-ring
3
K2
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 73
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 59, continued
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Gasket, Teflon [for gasket only - 30756445-502 (narrow profile L.P), or
30756445-503 (STG180)
6
6
6
K3
Gasket, Viton [for gasket only - 30756445-504 (narrow profile L.P), or
30756445-505 (STG180)
30756445-509
30753792-001
Gasket, Graphite (for replacement on existing STG/A X22/X40 Transmitter
with Graphite Gasket only)
Bolts & nuts kit, all models - narrow profile (carbon steel). Contains:
Nut, hex, metric, M8 carbon steel
4
4
K1
K4
Bolt, hex head, metric, M8, 50 mm long
30753793-002
30753793-003
A286 SS (NACE) Bolts & 304 SS (NACE) nuts kit, all models - narrow
profile. Contains:
Nut, hex, 5/16 (304 stainless steel)
Bolt, hex head, 5/16-18
4
4
K1
K4
Process Head Bolting 316 SS Non-NACE
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts. Contains:
5/16 –18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Heavy Hex Nuts
5/16 –18 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE Hex Cap Screw
4
4
K1
K4
Table 74
Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter
Body
Material
Fitting Size
Models: STA122, STA140,
STG140, STG170, STG180,
STA922, STA940
Carbon steel (Series 100)
Stainless steel (Series 100)
Carbon steel
9/16 - 18UNF-2B
9/16 - 18UNF-2B
1/2 in NPT
30755124-001
30755124-002
30755124-005
30755124-006
30755124-008
30755124-007
Stainless steel
1/2 in NPT
Monel
1/2 in NPT
Hastelloy C
1/2 in NPT
Continued on next page
220
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 60
Series 900 Dual-Head GP Meter Bodies.
K1
K2
K3
K2
K1
1
Table 75
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 60
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
1
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads (GP models)
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
K1
30757506-001
30757507-001
30757507-002
30757501-001
Head bolts carbon steel, 3/8-inch
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
4
4
4
Head bolts stainless steel/NACE, 3/8-inch
Kit includes: Bolts, Nuts
Process Head Bolting 3/8 UNC 316 SS Non-NACE
Kit Includes: Process Head Bolts and Nuts
K2
Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Head with side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets
Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket
30757501-002
30757502-001
30757502-002
Replacement heads carbon steel
Kit includes: Head without side vents, Head dummy CS, Head gaskets
Teflon, Head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent Plug, Gasket
Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads with side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets
Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Plugs, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
Replacement heads stainless steel
Kit includes: Heads without side vents, Head dummy SS, Head gaskets
Teflon, head gaskets Viton, Bushings, Vent plugs, Gaskets
30756941-005
30757505-001†
Stainless steel blind reference head (HR option)
K3
Process head gasket kit
Kit includes: 6 Teflon head gaskets (30757100-001), 6 Teflon flange
adapter gaskets (30679622-001), 6 Viton head gaskets (30749274-004)
Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown
K4
30679622-501
30749274-502
Flange adapter gaskets Teflon
Flange adapter gaskets Viton
6
6
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 61
Series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter Body.
Hexagonal Body
Round Body
Table 76
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 61
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body (LGP and LAP model)
1
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body (LGP and LAP model)
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Continued on next page
222
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 62
Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body.
Table 77
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 62
Key
No.
Part Number
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body (Flush Mount model)
1
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
30756445-508
51204496-001
51204497-001
Gasket Kit (0-rings)
316L SS Mounting Sleeve Kit
Calibration Sleeve Kit
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 63
Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body.
1
Extended Flange Design
Pseudo Flange Design
Continued on next page
224
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 78
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 63
Key Part Number
No.
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body
1
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
30749372-005
30749372-001
O-ring seal
O-ring seal
1
1
Optional Flange Adapter - Not Shown
30754419-006
30754419-008
30754419-022
30754419-024
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
Flange adapter kit (st. steel flange adapter with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (Monel flange adapter with 316 st. steel NACE bolts)
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg.
Flange adapter
2
1
1
1
K1
K2
K3
K4
Gasket
Filter screen
30754419-007
30754419-023
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with carbon steel bolts)
Flange adapter kit (Hastelloy C flange adapter with 316 st. steel NACE
bolts)
Bolt, hex head, 7/16-20 UNF, 1.375 inches lg.
2
1
1
1
K1
K2
K3
K5
Flange adapter
Gasket
30757503-001
Housing seal kit
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 64
High Temperature Meter Body.
1
1
Sanitary Seal
Small Flange
NPT
Table 79
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64
Key Part Number
No.
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body
1
1
model number
from nameplate
plus R300
Sanitary Seal Head and Gasket
51204982-001
51204982-003
51204982-002
51204984-001
Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ st.stl. hardware)
Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Stainless Steel Head w/ SS NACE. hardware)
Sanitary Seal Head GP/I (Hastelloy Head w/ st.stl. hardware)
Gasket GP/I (includes Teflon gasket and Viton O-ring)
Flange Adapter - Not Shown
51204983-001
51204983-002
51204983-017
51204983-018
51204983-003
51204983-004
51204983-005
51204983-006
51204983-019
51204983-020
51204983-007
51204983-008
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Continued on next page
226
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 79
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 64, continued
Key Part Number
No.
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
51204983-013
51204983-014
51204983-023
51204983-024
51204983-015
51204983-016
51204983-009
51204983-010
51204983-021
51204983-022
51204983-011
51204983-012
51204983-025
51204983-026
51204983-037
51204983-038
51204983-027
51204983-028
51204983-029
51204983-030
51204983-039
51204983-040
51204983-031
51204983-032
51204983-033
51204983-034
51204983-041
51204983-042
51204983-035
51204983-036
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1” NPT Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1½” NPT Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 150# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 150# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1½” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (1½” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (1½” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts)
Flange adapter kit (2” st. stl. 300# w/ SS NACE bolts w/ vent/drain)
Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts)
Flange adapter kit (2” Hastelloy 300# w/ st. stl bolts w/ vent/drain)
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Figure 65
SFC Smart Field Communicator and Accessories.
1
K1
K2
K4
K3
Style
A
Style
B
K10
K8
K7
K6
2
3
4
7
5/6
K12
22378
Continued on next page
228
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 80
Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 65.
Key Part Number
No.
Description
Quantity
Per Unit
Battery pack assembly
1
1
See Figure 62
30755080-501
Style A – No longer available. Order conversion kit 30755131-001
Style B
30753046-501
LCD assembly
1
1
2
3
Interface cable assembly (with alligator clips)
30752453-501
30752453-503
30752453-505
6 feet (1.8 meters) long
12 feet (3.6 meters) long
20 feet (6 meters) long
Interface cable assembly (with EZ hooks)
1
4
30752453-502
30752453-504
30752453-506
6 feet (1.8 meters) long
12 feet (3.6 meters) long
20 feet (6 meters) long
30752438-501
30753739-501
30752834-501
DC battery charger, AA Nicad cell , 120 Vac
DC battery charger, AA Nicad cell, 240 Vac (Universal-European plug)
Carrying case, vinyl
1
1
1
5
6
7
Key Part Number
No.
Description
Quantity
Per Kit
30753194-001
Replacement hardware kit
Bumper, recess
4
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
K1
K2
Screw, metric, M3, socket head
Cover, battery compartment
Label, battery cover
K3
K4
Carry strap
K6
Harness assembly, power/charger
Actuator
K7
K10
K12
Socket head wrench kit, metric
Contents:
(1) Hex head socket wrench, size 2.5 mm
(1) Hex head socket wrench, size 3 mm
(1) Hex head socket wrench, size 4 mm
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.1
Replacement Parts, Continued
Table 81
Summary of Recommended Spare Parts
Reference
Figure Key
Spares for
Part Number
Description
1-10 10-100 100-
Nmbr. Nmbr. Units
Units
1000
Units
Figs. 55 and 56
Electronics Housing Assembly
51309397-501
Analog Only Electronics, Transmitter Option AN
Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,4G
Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,NE
Analog Only Electronics, Options AN,NE,4G
DE/Analog Electronics, Option DE
DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,4G
DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,NE
DE/Analog Electronics, Options DE,NE,4G
55
5
1
1-2
2-4
51309397-504
51309397-511
51309397-514
51309397-506
51309397-507
51309397-516
51309397-517
30757503-001
Series 100/900 housing seal kit
55 & 56
56
K1
1
1
1-2
1
2-4
1-2
51205897-501
Series 100/900 terminal assembly without lightning
protection
3/K2
51404078-502
30757505-001
Series 100/900 terminal assembly with lightning
protection
1
1-4
4-10
Process head gasket kit
For STD924-A, B, E, F, and J; STD930-A, B, E, F, and
J; STG944; STG974 models
Teflon and Viton
58,60
57
K3
K6
For all other Series 100 DP and STD924-C, D, G, H, K,
and L; STD930-C, D, G, H, K, and L; and STD974
models
Teflon
Viton
30753788-003
30753788-004
For STA122, STA140, STA922, STA940, STG140, and
STG170
Teflon and Viton
59
59
K3
K3
30754154-002
30754154-003
For STG180
1
1-2
2-4
Meter Body
Specify complete
Series 100/900 DP Models
57
57,58
59
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
model number from Series 900 DP Models
nameplate plus R300 Series 100/900 GP/AP Models
Series 900 GP Dual Head Model
60
Series 100/900 Inline and Series 900 AP Models
61
Series 900 Flush Mount Models
62
Series 100/900 Flange Mount Models
Series 100 High Temperature Models
63
64
230
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 13 —Reference Drawings
13.1
Wiring Diagrams
External Wiring
Diagrams
Wiring diagram drawing numbers are listed here for ST 3000 Release
300, Series 100 and 900 Transmitters. These wiring diagrams are
included in numerical order behind this page for wiring reference.
ST 3000
Description
Drawing Number
30753607
For non-intrinsically safe application
For intrinsically safe application (FM)
For intrinsically safe application (CSA)
For intrinsically safe application (CENELEC)
Release 300
Series 100, 900
Transmitters
51204241
51204242
51204243
Transmitter
Dimension Drawings
Dimension drawings for individual transmitter models are available and
are listed in the ST 3000 Release 300 installation guide document
supplied with your transmitter. If you need a copy of a drawing, please
determine the appropriate drawing number and contact your Honeywell
representative to obtain a copy.
232
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A – Table III Options in Model Number
A.1
Table III Options Reference
Codes and
descriptions
The following table lists available Table III options alphabetically and
numerically by their codes and gives a brief description of the options.
Note that restrictions do apply based on other as-built transmitter
characteristics and some options are mutually exclusive.
If Code is. . .
Then, transmitter option is . . .
A1
A2
1/2-inch NPT to M20 316 stainless steel conduit adapter.
1/2-inch NPT to 3/4-inch NPT 316 stainless steel conduit adapter.
Blind DIN stainless steel adapter flanges mounted with NACE bolts on process head.
B1 or B2
CC
Custom calibration to user specified range and user specified transmitter tag number
entered and stored in memory.
CF
CM
CV
CR
Calibration Fixture (with ¼” NPT Port for pressure source) for STG93P only.
Compound characterized meter body.
Stainless steel center vent drain and bushing.
A286 stainless steel and 302/304 stainless steel (NACE) nuts for process heads and
316 stainless steel (NACE) bolts for mounting flange adapter to process head.
DN
FB
F1
316 stainless steel modified DIN process heads.
Flat mounting bracket (carbon steel).
Calibration test report and certificate of conformance (F3399).
Certificate of conformance (F3391).
F3
F5
Certificate of Origin (F0195).
F7
NACE certificate (F0198).
HR
LP
LT
Stainless steel reference head (carbon steel is standard).
Lightning protection.
Low temperature (–50°C) ambient limit.
Angle mounting bracket (carbon steel).
Analog meter (0 to 100% linear, 0 to 10 square root).
MB
ME
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A.1
Table III Options Reference, Continued
Codes and descriptions,
continued
If Code is. . .
Then, transmitter option is . . .
MS
316LSS Mounting Sleeve (requires customer installation to process) for STG93P
only.
OX
SB
Clean transmitter for Oxygen or Chlorine service with certificate.
Angle mounting bracket (stainless steel).
SH
316 stainless steel electronics housing with M20 conduit connections.
Local Smart Meter
SM
SV
Side vent/drain in process head (end vent/drain is standard).
1/2-inch, NPT, stainless steel, adapter flange for process head.
Stainless steel customer wired -on tag (blank).
Factory configured per user supplied data.
S1 or S2
TB
TC
TF
Teflon process head gasket (Viton is standard).
TG
Wired-on, stainless steel customer tag (4-lines, 28 characters per line; customer
supplied information).
TP
T1 or T2
VT
Over-pressure leak test with F3392 certificate.
1/2-inch, NPT, Hastelloy C, adapter flange for process head.
Viton head gaskets (1/2-inch adapter gaskets are special).
1/2-inch, NPT, Monel, adapter flange for process head.
Write protection.
V1 or V2
WP
W1
Additional warranty for 1 year.
W2
Additional warranty for 2 years.
W3
Additional warranty for 3 years.
W4
Additional warranty for 4 years.
ZS
Local Zero and Span adjustments.
None.
00
Continued on next page
234
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A.1
Table III Options Reference, Continued
Codes and descriptions,
continued
If Code is. . .
Then, transmitter option is . . .
1C
FM approval body certification for:
• Explosionproof/Flameproof Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D
• Dust Ignition Proof Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
• Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
1S
2J
FM approval body certification for:
• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
CSA approval body certification for :
• Explosionproof Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D
• Dust Ignition Proof Class II, III, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
• Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
2S
3A
CSA approval body certification for :
• Intrinsically Safe Class I, II, III, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
LCIE approval body certification for:
• Flame Proof/ CENELEC EEx d IIC T6
• Intrinsically Safe/CENELEC EEx ia IIC T5
3D
3N
LCIE approval body certification for:
• Flame Proof/ CENELEC EEx d IIC T6
Zone 2 (Europe) certification for:
• Self-Declared per 94/4/EC (ATEX4)
Ex II 3 GD T6 X
Ui ≤ 42V ≤ (Zone 2)
–40 ≤ Ta ≤ 93°C
IP66/67
3S
Approval body certification for:
• Intrinsically Safe/CENELEC EEx ia IIC T5
4G or 4H
SA approval body certification for:
• Intrinsically Safe Ex ia IIC T4
• Non-Incendive Ex n IIC T6 (T4 with Local Smart Meter option)
5A
9X
VNIIVE approval body certification for:
•
Intrinsically Safe OEx ia IIC T6 X
No certification
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B – Freeze Protection of Transmitters
Possible Solutions/Methods
B.1
Problem
When water is present in the process fluid and ambient temperatures can
fall below the freezing point (32°F/0°C), pressure transmitters and their
piping require freeze protection. Transmitters may also require
continuous heating, if the process fluid is tar, wax, or other medium
which will solidify at normal ambient. However, uncontrolled steam or
electric heating, in addition to wasting energy, can cause errors and
accidentally destroy the transmitter.
Solution
These two basic solutions are possible:
• Eliminate the need for heating the transmitter by keeping the
freezable process fluid out of direct contact with transmitter.
• Control the steam or electric heat to prevent overheating on warm
days while protecting against freeze-ups under the coldest
conditions.
The other paragraphs in this section review a number of methods for
implementing both solutions.
Sealing liquid method
The simplest and least costly method is to use a sealing liquid in the
transmitter meter body and its impulse piping to the process. The small
contact (interface) area between the sealing liquid and the process fluid
reduces the mixing of the two fluids.
You should select a sealing liquid that has a greater specific gravity than
the process fluid to inhibit mixing. It also must have freezing and
boiling temperatures compatible with the range of temperatures existing
at the site, including the heated interface.
WARNING
WARNING — The user must verify the compatibility of any sealing
liquid with their process fluid.
A reliable sealing liquid is a 50/50 percent (by volume) solution of
ethylene-glycol and water. This solution has a specific gravity of 1.070 at
60°F (15°C), a freezing temperature of –34°F (–36°C), and a boiling
temperature of +225°F (+106°C) at atmospheric pressure. Conventional
antifreeze liquids for automobile coolant systems such as Prestone and
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Sealing liquid method,
continued
Zerex are solutions of ethylene-glycol with some rust inhibitors and
possibly leak sealants added; they may be used in place of pure ethylene-
glycol.
Another sealing liquid, used in many chemical plants, is dibutylphalate an
oily-type liquid with a specific gravity of 1.045 at 70°F (21°C). It has a
boiling point 645°F (340°C) and does not freeze so it can be used down to
about –20°F (–30°C).
Figures B-1 and B-2 show typical piping installations for this method. The
process fluid must be heated above its freezing point. This is frequently
done by lagging in (insulating) the connecting nipple, shut-off valve and
“T” connector with the process piping. Where the process piping itself
requires heating, a steam or electric trace is run around their components
with consideration given to the boiling point of the sealing liquid.
Figure B-1
Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than
Process Fluid.
1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe nipple 6" long
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe
(slope at least 1"
per foot downward
1/2" seamless pipe
(short as possible to
reduce head effect)
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" pipe union
or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
1/2" 3-valve
manifold,
standard type
Differential
pressure
transmitter
Continued on next page
238
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Sealing liquid
method, continued
Figure B-2
Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than
Process Fluid.
1/2" shut-off valve (thru
port type desirable)
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless
pipe nipple 6"
long
1/2" pipe cross
with 2 pipe plugs
1/2" seamless pipe
(slope at least 1"
per foot downward
1/2" seamless pipe
(short as possible to
reduce head effect)
1/2" seamless
pipe nipple 6" long
1/2" shut-off
valve (thru port
type desirable)
1/2" pipe union
or coupling
1/2" 3-valve
manifold,
Process pressure
transmitter
standard type
Differential
pressure
transmitter
Make both HP and LP
connections as shown.
The installation should be checked every 6 to 12 months to verify that the
sealing liquid is at its required specific gravity.
Purging
Purging air or water purges are commonly used to prevent viscous
materials from clogging the impulse lines to pressure, level, or flow
transmitters. The bubbler system, using a constant-air flow regulator, is
particularly common on open tank liquid level applications. No heating of
impulse lines or transmitter is required, but normal precautions are
required to keep water out of the air supply system.
Gas applications
We must not overlook the possibility of condensate freezing in impulse
lines to transmitters measuring gas flow or pressure. Although these
components could be heated similar to water and steam applications, the
simplest and best approach is to install transmitters so that they are self
draining. This means that the impulse lines are connected to the lowest
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Gas applications,
continued
point in the transmitter meter body and the piping is sloped downward at
least one inch per foot. (Side-connected transmitters with vent-drains at a
lower point in the meter body must be regularly checked to assure
condensate removal.) If the transmitter is located below the process taps
(not recommended), piping must still run downward from the transmitter
to the drain point and then up to the process as shown in Figure B-3.
Steam or electric heating of the drain point will prevent pipe rupture due
to freezing.
Figure B-3
Piping Installation for Gas Flow.
Transmitter
Mechanical
(diaphragm) seals
Diaphragm seals on the impulse lines provide the most expensive, yet
broadest application of all the methods. Similar in principle to the liquid
seals, diaphragm seals eliminate the possibility of seal liquid carry-over
into the process fluid. This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance
checks to assure full and equal liquid seal legs. Welded diaphragm seals
with special fills permit temperatures from –34° to 600°F (–36° to 315°C)
at the process interface which can therefore be steam or electrically heated
to assure viscosity of tars and similar high-freezing point fluids under the
coldest conditions.
Continued on next page
240
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Mechanical
(diaphragm) seals,
continued
You must be careful to specify large enough diaphragms to accommodate
expansion and contraction of the fill fluid under varying temperatures
without overextending the diaphragm into its stiff area. In general,
conventional diaphragm seals are satisfactory for pressure ranges above
approximately 75 psig with special large diameter elements required for
low pressure or differential pressure measurements.
You can lag (insulate) impulse lines and diaphragm seals with the process
piping, but this practice is only common with liquid level applications
involving highly viscous materials unsuitable for 1/2-inch impulse lines.
Use a tank-mounted flanged seal in such installations. Otherwise, it is
more desirable to keep the capillary lengths short, the transmitter
accessible for maintenance, and (for flow applications) the normal 3-valve
manifold assembly close to the transmitter for normal service checks.
Thus, the impulse lines, valving and diaphragm seals with 1/2-inch
connections would be electrically or steam traced, with high temperature
steam permitted without damage to the transmitter. See Figures B-4 and
B-5 for typical piping layouts.
Figure B-4
Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with
Metal Diaphragm Seals.
The impulse piping, 3-valve
manifold, and upper flanges
of the metal diaphragm seals
must be insulated and, where
required, also heated by
electric or steam.
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type with
suitable temperature rating)
Differential pressure
transmitter with metal
diaphragm seals
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Mechanical
(diaphragm) seals,
continued
Figure B-5
Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with
Metal Diaphragm Seal.
Impulse piping, shut-off valve, and
diaphragm seal distance must be as
short as possible and insulated along
with the process pipe or vessel
Shut-off valve
Process pressure
transmitter with
metal diaphragm
seal
Pipe union or
coupling
Electric heating
Most transmitters will withstand higher temperatures at their process
interfaces (bodies) than at their electronics. Normally, it is impractical to
heat transmitter bodies above 225 to 250°F (107 to 121°C) without radiant
and conducted heat exceeding the rating at the electronics (normally
200°F/93°C). Prefabricated insulated enclosures with integral heating
coils and thermostats set at 200°F (93°C) can assure viscosity of fluids
which freeze below 180°F (82°C) while assuring safe transmitter
operation. For water or similar lower-temperature mediums, the control
can be set at 50°F (10°C) to save energy and call for heat only when
temperature and wind conditions require.
Systems can be engineered for uncontrolled, continuous electric heating to
prevent water freezing at 0°F (–18°C) and 20 mph wind velocity, while
not exceeding 225°F (107°C) at the transmitter body at 90°F (32°C)
ambient and zero wind velocity. The operating costs in energy for these
systems usually exceed the high initial cost of the thermostat systems.
Never attempt to maintain freeze points above 100°F (38°C) without
thermostat controls since the Btu required to prevent freezing will
normally exceed the body temperature rating under opposite extremes.
Continued on next page
242
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Electric heating,
continued
Although systems are available with hollow bolts replacing the normal
transmitter body bolts and containing electrical heating elements and
thermostats, certain precautions are required with such arrangements.
Some transmitter meter body bolts are too small to accept the available
thermostats. Also thermostat settings should not approach the body
temperature limit because the heat gradient across the meter body can be
such that limits are exceeded adjacent to the heating elements even when
the thermostat setting is lower.
Electrical heating systems are available in explosionproof ratings for
Class I, Group D, Division I and II installations.
The possibility of electric supply failure must be considered. For this
reason, we recommend using alarm devices with manual acknowledgment
and reset.
See Figures B-6 and B-7 for typical piping installations.
Figure B-6
Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and
Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and Control.
Electric heating cable
Temperature
sensor
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type )
Temperature
controller
(thermostat)
Differential pressure
transmitter
Insulated enclosure
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Electric heating,
continued
Figure B-7
Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and
Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control.
Shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
Electric heating
cable
Union or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
Insulated
enclosure
Temperature
controller
(thermostat)
Temperature
sensor
Steam heating
Steam heating is perhaps the most common, yet potentially the most
damaging method of protecting transmitters from freeze-ups. Since steam
is generated for use in the overall process operation, it is considered an
available by-product. The most important point to remember when steam
heating transmitter meter bodies is the temperature of the steam that will
be used and its pressure. We recommend that you review the next
paragraph Superheated steam considerations to get a better understanding
of the temperature problem with steam heating. In brief, do not assume
that 30 psig steam is 274°F (134°C) and cannot damage a transmitter rated
for 250°F (121°C). With steam heating, as with electrical, you should use
insulated transmitter body housing, impulse piping and valves.
Continued on next page
244
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Steam heating,
continued
It is common practice to use conventional steam traps on all steam heating
systems. They permit live, superheated steam to enter the heating coils
and piping down to the trap. You should also use conventional steam traps
with lower pressure desuperheated steam which cannot overheat the
transmitter under warm-day conditions. If the heating pipes are not
carefully installed to eliminate low spots and trapped condensate in the
piping, they could freeze at low temperatures.
All steam traps require a periodic maintenance program. Dirt, scale, and
water softeners will cause traps to stick or jam which result in their either
blowing steam continuously or not blowing steam, allowing condensate
freeze-up in cold weather. When steam traps are used for cold-weather
freeze protection of water lines, a thermostat controlled steam supply
valve, which will shut off the steam at ambient temperatures higher than
50°F (10°C), will save steam and prevent overheating.
A more general solution is offered by a specialized type of trap which
throttles condensate flow based on its temperature. This backs up hot
water in the radiator within the insulated transmitter enclosure, assuring
temperatures no higher than the saturated steam at the reduced pressure.
Models are available to set the condensate temperature from about 70° to
200°F (21° to 93°C). They must be located within 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30
cm) of the transmitter body and , like all steam traps, they also require
periodic maintenance. The engineering of this type system is more
complex than electric systems since the amount of heat loss upstream of
the CTV valve under varying conditions will determine the location of the
steam/water interface. It could occur within the heater coil or further up
the steam line, thus affecting the heating efficiency within the insulated
enclosure. Therefore, steam control of materials which freeze or become
too viscous above 100°F (38°C) should probably not be attempted without
some experimenting with the specific piping layout used.
Uncontrolled steam heating, even with the best pressure regulation and
desuperheating of steam, should not be used to maintain transmitter
temperatures above 100°F (38°C), since this type of fixed Btu input must
either over or under-heat under normal ambient swings.
As with electric heating, there are many types of commercial steam
heating units available such as radiant heaters, hollow meter body studs or
just tubing lagged to the impulse piping and transmitter body. The same
precaution applies to the use of hollow studs as on the electrical versions.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Steam heating,
continued
See Figure B-8 and B-9 for typical piping installations. Table B-1
summarizes the temperature ranges for the various freeze protection
systems.
Table B-1
Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems
Diaphragm
Seals
Operating
Temperature
Steam Heating
No Seals
Electric Heat
Liquid Seals
Range
Ethylene Dibutyl-
Trap
CTV
Valve
No
Thermo-
ο
οC
36
30
10
38
93
Glycol
Phthalate
Control stated
F
34
20
50
100
200
225
325
600
106
163
315
Note: Broken lines indicate areas of caution.
Continued on next page
246
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Steam heating,
continued
Figure B-8
Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Steam Heating.
Steam Supply (low pressure)
Pipe insulated with
waterproof outer cover
Shut-off valve
1/4" OD steam tracer line
Impulse piping with
1/4" thick insulation
Steam heat
tracer line
Pipe strap about
every 15"
Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping
1/2" , 3-valve manifold
(standard type )
Steam trap or
condensate
temperature
valvle
Differential pressure
transmitter
Insulated enclosure
Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and
condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"
per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.
All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Steam heating,
continued
Figure B-9
Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with
Steam Heating.
Steam Supply (low pressure)
1/4" OD steam tracer line
Pipe insulated with
waterproof outer cover
Shut-off valve
Steam heat
Impulse piping with
1/4" thick insulation
tracer line
Pipe strap about
every 15"
Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping
Shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
Union or coupling
Process pressure
transmitter
Steam trap or
condensate
temperature
valvle
Insulated enclosure
Condensate return from steam trap. All steam and
condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1"
per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate.
All condensate lines must be protected from freezing.
Superheated steam
considerations
We must remember that the temperature of steam is 212°F (100°C) only at
the normal atmospheric pressure of about 14.7 pounds per square inch
absolute (psia). If the pressure of steam is increased above 14.7 psia, the
temperature of the steam is also increased. For example, if we have steam
at 30 pounds per square inch gage (psig), the steam temperature is 274°F
(134°C).
Continued on next page
248
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Superheated steam
considerations,
continued
On industrial flow and pressure measurement applications, we may be
required to use steam to heat the impulse piping to the flow or pressure
transmitter, as well as the transmitter itself. For these applications, we
must verify the temperature of the heating steam used. As an example,
assume that steam at 100 psig saturated (338°F/170°C) is to be reduced to
30 psig pressure for the heating system. Too frequently, it is assumed that
this pressure reduction will result in steam at 274°F (134°C), the
temperature of saturated steam at 30 psig. Wrong! A reduction of the
steam pressure will not appreciably decrease the initial steam temperature.
In our example, we were talking about saturated steam in the main header
from the boiler. But modern industrial boilers cannot afford to let waste
heat go up the stack. After reaching the boiling point in the drum, the
steam flows through a series of pipes in the second pass of the flue gas
exit, extracting additional heat energy and being raised to a temperature
higher than the saturation temperature at the same pressure. This is
superheat and, depending on boiler design, it may amount to 50 to 300°F
(10 to 149°C) above the saturated steam temperature. It also permits
packing more heat energy in a given size pipe for transmission from the
process. Thus, in the typical application, the problem of steam heating is
compounded by the additional superheat in the main header.
Specifically, when steam is reduced in pressure, it retains about the same
latent heat or the same Btu’s/pound at the reduced pressure. Therefore, in
our example, steam at 100 psig and 338°F (170°C) when reduced to 30
psig steam will have a temperature of 306°F (152°C) or a loss of only
32°F (18°C).
This steam temperature can only be reduced by using a desuperheater.
This device mixes cold water with the superheated steam to reduce its
temperature by removing Btu’s per pound of water (steam). It is also
possible to use temperature controlled steam traps, which actually allow
the steam to condense to water and therefore reduce its temperature to a
pre-set value.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1
Possible Solutions/Methods, Continued
Superheated steam
considerations,
continued
Table B-2 lists the various values of steam pressure, saturated steam
temperatures at these pressures, degrees of superheat added to the
saturated steam and finally the actual temperature of each when it is
reduced to 30 psig steam.
Table B-2
Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values
Pressure
(1)
Saturated
Temperature
(2)
Superheat Added
(3)
Final Steam
Temperature
(2) + (3)
Actual Temperature
of Steam When
Reduced From (1)*
to 30 psig
psig
50
°F
°C
°F
None
100
120
150
200
250
°C
None
55
°F
°C
°F
°C
298
338
366
387
448
489
147
170
185
198
231
254
298
438
486
537
648
739
147
225
251
281
342
393
290
420
460
500
600
660
143
215
234
260
316
349
100
150
200
400
600
66
83
111
139
*(1) equals pressure in column one with superheat added.
250
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C – Configuration Record Sheet
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter
Configuration Record Sheet
Model Number:
Series:
Type:
100
DP
900
AP
GP
RS
FM
Range:
Mode of Operation:
Tag Number:
Analog
Linear
DE
Output Conformity:
Square Root
0.00
8.0
Damping Time (Seconds):
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
16.0
32.0
Engineering Units :
"H2O_39F
PSI
MPa
KPa
bar
KG/cm^2
mmH2O_4C
inHg_32F
mmHg_0C
mbar
ATM
G/cm^2
mH2O_4C
"H2O_68F
"H2O_60F
Lower Range Value: 4 mAdc =
Upper Range Value: 20 mAdc =
Output Signal Mode (DE Mode Only):
Single Range
Dual Range (STDC)
W/DB (6 Byte)
Single Range W/SV
Message Format (DE Mode Only):
W/O DB (4 Byte)
Failsafe Mode STDC Card (DE Mode Only):
F/S = B/O Lo
F/S = B/O Hi
F/S = FSO, B/O Lo
F/S = FSO, B/O Hi
F/S = FSO, LKG
F/S = LKG
Failsafe Direction (Analog Mode):
Upscale
Downscale
Read Only
Write Protect Option:
Configured By:
Read and Write
Date:
/
/
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D – Hazardous Locations Reference
Reference
Information
Information is provided to clarify the hazardous location installation
requirements in North America and internationally. An explanation of
the applicable enclosure classification systems is also provided.
D.1
North American Classification of Hazardous Locations
Electrical Codes
Installation of electrical apparatus within hazardous (classified)
locations of the United States is conducted under the provisions of the
National Electrical Code (NEC), ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 500; and
within Canada, under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code
(CEC) C22.1, Part 1, Section 18.
Classes
Hazardous (classified) locations, in both the United States and Canada,
are categorized into one of these three classes.
Class
Description of Hazardous Location
I
Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in
quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures.
II
Presence of combustible dusts, powders or grains.
Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings.
III
Divisions
The classes listed above are further categorized based upon the level of
risk present.
Division
Description of Risk
1
Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases
or vapors, or combustible dust in suspension are continuously,
intermittently or periodically present under normal operating
conditions.
2
Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are present, but
normally confined within closed containers or systems from which
they can escape only under abnormal or fault conditions.
Combustible dusts are not normally in suspension nor likely to be
thrown into suspension.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.1
North American Classification of Hazardous
Locations, Continued
Examples
Given the criteria above, the following examples are made:
A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable
fibers or material processing combustible flyings are
handled, manufactured or used.
A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable
fibers are stored or handled.
Groups
Flammable gases, vapors and ignitable dusts, fibers and flyings are
classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the most
easily-ignitable mixture within air. Group classifications are as follows:
Class I
Description of Atmosphere
Group
A
B
Atmospheres containing acetylene.
Atmospheres containing hydrogen, fuel and combustible
process gases containing more than 30 percent hydrogen by
volume, or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.
C
D
Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or vapors
of equivalent hazard.
Atmospheres such as acetone, ammonia, benzene, butane,
cyclopropane, ethanol, gasoline, hexane, methanol, methane,
natural gas, naphtha, propane or gases or vapors of equivalent
hazard.
Class II
Description
Group
E
Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including
aluminum, magnesium, and their commercial alloys, and other
metals of similarly hazardous characteristics.
F
Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts
including carbon black, charcoal, coal or other dusts that have
been sensitized by other materials so that they present an
explosion hazard.
G
Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in
Group E or F, including flour wood, grain, and other dusts of
similarly hazardous characteristics.
Continued on next page
254
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.1
North American Classification of Hazardous
Locations, Continued
Methods of Protection
The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use
in given locations.
Protection Concept
Designation
Permitted Use
Principle
Explosionproof
XP
Division 1 & 2
Contains explosion and
quenches flame.
Intrinsic Safety
IS
Division 1 & 2
Limit energy of sparks under
normal and fault conditions.
Pressurized
Pressurized
Nonincendive
Type X and Y
Type Z
NI
Division 1
Division 2
Division 2
Keeps flammable gas out.
Keeps flammable gas out.
No arcs, sparks or hot surfaces
under normal conditions
Temperature
Classification
Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous
(classified) location must also be classified for the maximum surface
temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as
referenced to either 40°C (104°F) or the maximum operating ambient of
the equipment (whichever is greater). The maximum surface
temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of
the hazardous atmosphere present. The temperature shall be indicated in
identification numbers as listed in the following table.
Maximum Temperature
Temperature
Identification Number
Degrees C
Degrees F
450
300
280
260
230
215
200
180
165
160
135
120
100
85
842
572
536
500
446
419
392
356
329
320
275
248
212
185
T1
T2
T2A
T2B
T2C
T2D
T3
T3A
T3B
T3C
T4
T4A
T5
T6
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.1
North American Classification of Hazardous
Locations, Continued
Intrinsically Safe
Apparatus
The Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows.
Parameters
Parameter
Description
Vmax
Maximum safe voltage that can be applied to the apparatus
terminals.
Imax
Ci
Maximum safe current that can be applied to the apparatus
terminals.
Unprotected capacitance in the apparatus that can be
considered present at the terminals.
Li
Unprotected inductance in the apparatus that can be
considered present at the terminals.
Associated Apparatus
Parameters
The Associated Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows.
Parameter
Description
Voc
Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the
hazardous (classified) location. This voltage is the maximum
from a single channel.
Isc
*Vt
Maximum output current that can be delivered to the
hazardous (classified) location. This current is the maximum
from a single channel.
Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the
hazardous (classified) location. This voltage is the maximum
across any combination of terminals of a multiple channel
configuration.
*It
Maximum output current that can be delivered to the
hazardous (classified) location. This current is the maximum
through any combination of terminals of a multiple channel
configuration.
Ca
La
Maximum capacitance that can be connected to the
apparatus.
Maximum inductance that can be connected to the apparatus.
*CSA does not recognize these parameters at this time.
Continued on next page
256
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.1
North American Classification of Hazardous
Locations, Continued
Entity Concept
Under entity requirements, the concept allows interconnection of
intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus, not specifically
examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the
voltage (Vmax ) and current (Imax ), which intrinsically safe apparatus
can receive and remain intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be
equal to or greater than the voltage (Voc or Vt ) and current (Isc or It )
levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering
faults and applicable factors. In addition, the maximum unprotected
capacitance (Ci ) and inductance (Li ) of the intrinsically safe apparatus,
including interconnecting wiring, must be less than or equal to the
capacitance (Ca ) and inductance (La ) which can be safely connected to
the associated apparatus. If these criteria are met, then the combination
may be connected and remain intrinsically safe. Both FMRC and CSA
define the entity parameters in Tables D-1 and D-2.
Table D-1 Factory Mutual (FM) Entity Parameters
Code
1C
Description
Factory Mutual (FM) Approval
•
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D. Dust-
Ignitionproof for Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G. Suitable
for Class III, Division 1. Conduit seals required within 18” of
enclosure, Group A only.
•
Intrinsically Safe for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C &
D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class III, Division 1, T4
at 40°C, T3A at 93°C maximum ambient, when connected in
accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204241.
•
•
Nonincendive for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D;
Suitable for Classes II & III, Division 2, Groups F & G, T4 at 93°C
maximum ambient, hazardous locations. 42 Vdc max.
Environmental: Indoor & outdoor hazardous locations (NEMA 4X).
Intrinsic Safety
Class I, II, III, Divisions 1 and
Entity Parameters (1)
2, Groups A - G
42.4 V
VMax
≤
IMax = 225 mA
PMax = 1.2 W
Ci = 4.2 nF
Li = 0
With no integral indicator, or
with integral Smart Meter,
option SM.
Li =
With Analog Meter, option ME.
150 μH
(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204241.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.1
North American Classification of Hazardous
Locations, Continued
Table D-2 CSA Entity Parameters
Code
2j
Description
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
•
Explosion Proof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C & D. Dust-
Ignition-Proof for Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G; Class III,
Division 1. Conduit seals not required. 42 Vdc max.
•
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Groups A, B, C & D; Class II,
Groups E, F & G; Class III, Divisions 1, T4 at 40°C, T3A at 93°C
maximum ambient. Install per Honeywell drawing 51204242.
•
•
Suitable for Class I, II & III, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F &
G hazardous locations, T4 at 93°C. 42 Vdc max.
Environmental: Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations
(Encl 4X).
CSA Certified Barriers (1)
Class I, II, III, Division 1 and 2,
Groups
A - G
C - G
28V / 200 Ω
20V / 150 Ω
(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204242.
258
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.2
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
Classification of Hazardous Locations
About IEC
The IEC has established a number of recommendations applying to the
construction of explosion protected electrical apparatus identified.
These recommendations are found within IEC 79-0 through
79-15 and 79-28.
For all EC countries as well as various neighboring countries
(CENELEC member states), the European Standards EN 50 014 to EN
50 020 and EN 50 039 apply for the construction of explosion protected
electrical apparatus. They were established on the basis of the IEC.
However these recommendations are much more detailed by
comparison.
Zones
Within IEC7-10, hazardous locations are categorized into one of these
three zones.
ZONE
Description of Hazardous Location
0
Explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously, or is
present for long periods.
1
2
Explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation.
Explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal
operation and, if it does occur, it will exist for a short period
only.
IEC Groups
Flammable gases, vapors and mists are further classified into groups
according to the energy required to ignite the most easily-ignitable
mixture within air. Apparatus is grouped according to the atmospheres
it may be used within as follows:
Group
Description of Atmosphere
IIC
Atmospheres containing acetylene, hydrogen, fuel and
combustible process gases or vapors of equivalent hazard.
IIB
IIA
Atmospheres such as ethyl ether, ethylene, or gasses or
vapors of equivalent hazard.
Atmospheres such as acetone, benzene, butane,
cyclopropane, ethanol, gasoline, hexane, methanol, methane,
natural gas, naphtha, propane or gases or vapors of
equivalent hazard.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.2
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
Classification of Hazardous Locations, Continued
IEC Methods of
Protection
The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use
in given locations.
Protection Concept
Designation
Permitted Use
Principle
Flameproof
d
Zone 1 & 2
Contains explosion and
quenches flame.
Intrinsic Safety
Intrinsic Safety
ia
ib
Zone 0, 1 & 2
Zone 1 & 2
Limits energy of sparks under
2 faults.
Limits energy of sparks under
1 fault
Pressurized
p
m
e
Zone 1
Keeps flammable gases out.
Keeps flammable gases out.
Encapsulation
Increased Safety
Zone 1 & 2
Zone 1 & 2
No arcs, sparks or hot
surface.
Powder Filled
q
Zone 1 & 2
Contains explosion and
quenches flame.
Oil Immersion
Non-sparking
o
Zone 1 & 2
Zone 2
Keeps flammable gases out.
nA
No arcs, sparks or hot
surfaces under normal
conditions.
Enclosed Break
Limited Energy
nC
nA
Zone 2
Zone 2
Contains explosion and
quenches flame.
Limits energy of sparks and
surface temperature under
normal conditions.
Restricted Breathing
nR
Zone 2
Keeps flammable gases out.
Continued on next page
260
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.2
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
Classification of Hazardous Locations, Continued
IEC Temperature
Classification
Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous
location must also be classified for the maximum surface temperature
that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to
the maximum operating ambient of the equipment. The maximum
surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition
temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present. The temperature shall
be indicated in identification numbers as listed in the following table.
Maximum Temperature
Temperature
Identification Number
Degrees C
Degrees F
450
300
200
135
100
85
842
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
572
392
275
212
185
Certification and
Conformity Details
Table D-3
CENELEC / LCIE Certification
Code
3D
Description
Flameproof, Supply ≤ 45 Vdc, IP 66/67EEx d IIC T6.
Intrinsically Safe EEx ia IIC T5, −40 ≤ Ta ≤ 93°C.
Flameproof, Supply ≤ 45 Vdc, IP 66/67 EEx d IIC T6.
3A
LCIE Intrinsic Safety Parameters (1)
Ui = 30 V
Ii = 100 mA
Pi = 1.2 W
Ci = 4.2 nF
Ri = 0
Li = 0
With no integral indicator, or with
integral Smart Meter, option SM.
Li =
With Analog Meter, option ME.
150 μH
(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204243.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.2
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
Classification of Hazardous Locations, Continued
Certification and
Conformity Details,
continued
Table D-4
Standards Australia (LOSC) Certification
Code
4H
Description
Intrinsically Safe Ex ia IIC T4 Class I Zone 0.
Flameproof Ex d IIC T6 Class I Zone 1
Non-Sparking Apparatus - Type of Protection ‘n’ Ex n IIC T6
Class I Zone 2
LOSC Intrinsic Safety Parameters (1)
Ui = 42.4 V
Ii = 225 mA
Pi = 1.2 W
Ci = 4.2 nF
Li = 0
With no integral indicator, or
with integral Smart Meter,
option SM.
Li =
With Analog Meter, option ME.
150 μH
(1) Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204309.
Table D-5
Zone 2 (Europe) Declaration of Conformity
Code
3N
Description
Electrical Apparatus With Type of Protection “n” per IEC 79-
15. IP 66/67.
Ex II 3 GD T(1) X (Council Directive 94/9/EC) −40 ≤ Ta ≤ 93°C.
Zone 2 Parameters
42 V
Ui
≤
≤
22 mA
Ii
Temp. Code (1) T4 at
Temp. Code (1) T5 at
Temp. Code (1) T6 at
Ta 93°C Maximum Ambient
Ta 80°C Maximum Ambient
Ta 65°C Maximum Ambient
Continued on next page
262
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.3
Enclosure Ratings
NEMA and IEC
Recognition
The NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association) enclosure
classifications are recognized in the US. The IEC Publication 529
Classifications are recognized throughout Europe and those parts of the
world that use the IEC standards as a basis for product certifications.
The following paragraphs provide a discussion of the Comparison
Between NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and IEC Enclosure
Classification Designations.
IEC Classifications
IEC Publication 529, Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided
by Enclosures, provides a system for specifying the enclosures of
electrical equipment on the basis of the degree of protection provided by
the enclosure. IEC 529 does not specify degrees of protection against
mechanical damage of equipment, risk of explosion, or conditions such
as moisture (produced for example by condensation), corrosive vapors,
fungus, or vermin.
NEMA Standards
NEMA Standards Publication 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
(1000 Volts Maximum), does test for environmental conditions such as
corrosion, rust, icing, oil, and coolants. For this reason, and because the
tests and evaluations for other characteristics are not identical, the IEC
enclosure classification designations cannot be exactly equated with
NEMA enclosure type numbers.
IEC Designations
Basically, the IEC designation consists of the letters IP followed by two
numerals. The first characteristic numeral indicates the degree of
protection provided by the enclosure with respect to persons and solid
foreign objects entering the enclosure. The second characteristic
numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure
with respect to the harmful ingress of water.
Continued on next page
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.3
Enclosure Ratings, Continued
IEC Designations,
continued
Table D-6 provides an approximate conversion from NEMA enclosure
type numbers to IEC enclosure classification designations. The NEMA
types meet or exceed the test requirements for the associated IEC
classifications; for this reason the Table cannot be used to convert
from IEC classifications to NEMA types.
Table D-6
NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC
Enclosure Classification
NEMA Enclosure
IEC Enclosure
Type Number
Classification Designation
1
IP 10
IP 11
IP 54
IP 14
IP 54
IP 56
IP 52
IP 67
IP 52
IP 54
2
3
3R
3S
4 and 4X
5
6 and 6P
12 and 12K
13
NOTE: This comparison is based on tests specified in IEC Publication 529
Process Sealing
Process Sealing for Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class
I, Zone 0, 1, and 2, Explosionproof Electrical Systems
ST 3000, Smart Pressure Transmitters
The ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart Pressure
Transmitters are CSA certified as “Dual Seal” devices in accordance
with ANSI/ISA–12.27.01–2003, Requirements for Process Sealing
between Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process
Fluids.
Accordingly, the ST 3000, Series 100, 100e, 600, and 900, Smart
Pressure Transmitters comply with the sealing requirements of NEC
Chapter 5. Special Occupancies, Article 500 — Hazardous (Classified)
Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions 1 and 2, Article 501 — Class
I Locations, Article 501-15, Sealing and Drainage, (f) Drainage, (3)
Canned Pumps, Process or Service Connections, Etc., Article 505 —
Class I, Zone 0, 1, and 2 Locations, Article 505-16, Sealing and
Drainage, (E) Drainage, (3) Canned Pumps, Process, or Service
Connections, and So Forth., and the Canadian Electrical Code rules 18-
264
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
6/08
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
092, 18-108, 18-158, J18-108 and J18-158.
Annunciation of a primary seal failure per ANSI/ISA–12.27.01 is
electronic and is displayed in various forms based on the type of
communication used for the particular transmitter. Failure of the
primary seal is considered a Critical Failure. Based on testing
annunciation of primary seal failure will occur in 7 hours or less.
The transmitter’s 4-20 mA output will be driven to the selected failsafe
direction – upscale or downscale.
The transmitter’s digital output (DE, HART, Fieldbus) will display any
of the following responses which could indicate a primary seal failure as
well as other meter body faults.
METER BODY FAULT, MB OVERLOAD, SUSPECT INPUT,
SENSOR FAILURE, DEVICE FAILURE.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Dropout
Square Root, 76
A
Analog and DE Modes, 56
E
Analog meter connections, 48
Analog Mode, 2
Electric Heating, 242
EMC Directive, 18
Enclosure ratings, 264
Engineering Units
Selecting, 79
B
Barrier Diaphragms
Cleaning and Inspecting, 171
Battery Pack
Engineering Units High and Low, 66
Environmental Conditions, 19
Installing and Charging, 22
Bracket
F
Mounting Transmitter, 27
Failsafe Direction
Changing, 156
C
Flange Adapter
Calibration
Installing, 42
Calibrating Analog Output Signal, 185
Calibrating Range with SFC, 189
Equipment Required, 184
Resetting, 192
Flange Connections
Description, 41
Flange mounted transmitter, 35
Mounting, 35
Typical Equipment Connections, 191
Communications
Flow Measurement (DP)
Starting Up, 129
Starting, 52
Flush Mounted Transmitter
Mounting, 34
Configuration Database, 61
Configuration Decisions
Summary, 67
Freeze Protection, 237
Configuration Parameters, 64
H
Hazardous locations reference
IEC Classifications, 259
North American Classifications, 253
Hold Memory
D
Damping, 64
Damping Time
Adjusting, 77
SFC, 62
Keystroke Summary, 78
DE Mode, 3
L
DE protocol format, 2
Diagnostic Messages, 196
Communication Errors, 200
Critical Failures, 200
Interpreting, 203
Lightning Protection, 46
Linear Output
Selecting, 74
Liquid Level Measurement (DP with Remote Seals)
Starting Up, 148
Interrupt Messages, 201
Invalid Key Entry, 201
Non-Critical Failures, 199
Diaphragm Seals, 240
Display and Keyboard Test
Running, 207
Liquid Level Measurement (DP)
Starting Up Pressurized Tank, 137
Starting Up Vented Tank, 134
Local Smart Meter
Set Up Summary (Using Meter Pushbuttons), 121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Local Smart Meter
N
Keystroke Summary (Using SFC), 103
Meter/Transmitter Interaction, 168
Options, 13
Non-volatile Memory
Copying data into non-volatile memory, 63
ST 3000, 62
Output Conformity, 105
Number Symbol “#”
Pushbuttons, 104
Clearing, 197
Reference Specifications, 24
Set Up Using Meter Psuhbuttons, 104
Set Up Using SFC, 97
O
Setting display of LRV (using meter pushbuttons), 110
Local Smart Meter Display
Description, 164
Operation Data
Accessing, 153
Output Conformity, 64
Keystroke Summary, 75
Selecting, 74
Error Codes, 167
Typical Indications, 165
Local Zero and Span
Smart Meter setup, 98
Output Mode
Adjusting (Procedure), 85
Loop wiring, 48
Running Analog Output Check, 126
Output Signal Indication
DE Mode Only, 65
Output Signal Mode
(DE Only) Selecting, 92
Keystroke Summary, 94
Ranges, 92
LRV (Lower Range Value), 64
LRV and URV
Keying in Values, 81
Keystroke Summary (Applied Pressures), 84
Keystroke Summary (Keying in Values), 82
Setting to Applied Pressures, 83
M
P
Maintenance
Parameters
Routine, 170
Configuration, 64
Memories
Piping, 38
Non-volatile, 62
Potential Noise Sources, 19
Power Supply Voltage
Operating Range, 43
Pressure Measurement (AP)
Starting Up, 146
SFC and ST 3000, 62
Message Format
(DE Only) Selecting \i, 95
DE Mode Only, 65
Keystroke Summary, 96
Meter Body
Pressure Measurement (DP)
Starting Up, 132
Replacing, 178
Pressure or Liquid Level Measurement (GP)
Starting Up, 141, 145
Pressure Ratings, 21
Process Connections
Summary, 40
Meter Engineering Units, 66
Mode and Software
Checking, 55
Mode of Operation
Changing, 58
Process Sealing, 47, 264
PWA
Keystroke Summary, 59
Model Number
Replacing, 175
Format, 4
Mounting Area
R
Considerations, 19
Mounting Location
Suggested, 39
Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter
Mounting, 36
Replacement parts, 209
Mounting Precautions
Model STD110, 32
Models STA122 and STA922, 30
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keystroke Summary, 73
Temperature Limits
Operating, 20
S
Save and Restore Database, 160
Procedure, 161
Transmitter mounting
Models STA122, STA922, 30
Transmitter options
Options, 233
Scratch Pad Area
Writing Data, 158
Sealing Liquid, 237
SFC
Transmitter Types, 5
Tthree-Valve Manifold
Piping, 38
Connecting to Transmitter, 51
Disconnecting, 123
Display Characteristics, 71
Model Designations, 9
Purpose, 8
Turndown Ratio, 77
U
SM 3000 Smart Meter connections, 48
Smart Meter. See Local Smart Meter
Smartline Configuration Toolkit, 1
Solution Support Center, xiii
Square Root Output, 75
Dropout, 76
Unit of Measurement, 64
URV (Upper Range Value), 64
V
Vibration Sources, 19
Selecting, 74
ST 3000 Smart Transmitter, 2
Startup Procedure
W
Reference, 125
Wiring Connections, 45
Write Protect Jumper
Start-Up Tasks
Reference, 16
Location and Selections, 56
Status Check
Running, 202
Z
Steam Heating, 244
Superheated Steam, 249
Zero and Span Adjust
Options, 13
Zero corrects, 32
Zero shift, 30
T
Tag Number, 64
Entering (Procedure), 72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6/08
ST 3000 Release 300 and SFC Model STS103 User’s Manual
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Honeywell Process Solutions
512 Virginia Drive
Fort Washington, PA 19034
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|